CCM Freedom

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage
June 2006
Sheet 1223
30.0-1
Home
Index
Master TOC
Motor Control Centers Low Voltage
Contents
Series 2100 Freedom & Advantage Motor Control Centers General Description. . . . . . . . . 30.1-1 Characteristics UL Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1 Replacement Units . . . . . . . 30.1-1 NEMA Wiring Classications . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1 Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-2 Wireways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-2 Bus System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-3 Starter Units . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-5 dc Starter Units. . . . . . . . . . 30.1-6 Feeder Tap Units. . . . . . . . . 30.1-6 Stab Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-6 Handle Mechanism . . . . . . 30.1-6 Device Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-7 Unit Wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-7 Unit Maintenance . . . . . . . . 30.1-8 Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . 30.1-8 Unit Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-8 Additional Equipment . . . . 30.1-9 Control and Load Terminations. . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-9 Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-10 PowerNet Monitoring and Communications . . . 30.1-10 DeviceNet Communications and Control. . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-10 Harmonic Correction . . . . . 30.1-11 Additional Services . . . . . . 30.1-11 Layout Guide Index . . . . . . . . . 30.1-12 Starter Sizing, Technical Data and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-13 Series 2100 Intelligent Technologies Motor Control Centers General Description . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 Characteristics UL Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 Replacement Units . . . . . . . 30.2-1 NEMA Wiring Classications . 30.2-1 Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-2 Wireways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-2 Bus System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-3 Starter Units . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-5 Feeder Tap Units . . . . . . . . . 30.2-5 Stab Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-6 Handle Mechanism . . . . . . . 30.2-6 Device Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-7 Unit Wrapper. . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-7 Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-7 Motor/Load Terminal Blocks . 30.2-8 Unit Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-8 Additional Equipment. . . . . 30.2-8 Control and Load Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-8 Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-9 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-9 TVSS Surge Protection. . . . 30.2-9 Automatic Transfer Switches . 30.2-9 Harmonic Correction . . . . . 30.2-10 Communications DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-11 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-12 Monitoring and Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . 30.2-12 Additional Services. . . . . . . 30.2-12 Layout Guide Index . . . . . . . . . 30.2-14 Starter Sizing, Technical Data and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-15
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Specications See Eatons Cutler-Hammer Product Specication Guide on enclosed CD-ROM: 1995 CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sections 16482A, 16482B 2004 CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sections 26 24 19.11, 26 24 19.13
Freedom and Advantage Motor Control Center
Intelligent Technologies Motor Control Center
CA08104001E
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com
30.0-2 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage

Home TOC Index
June 2006
Sheet 1224
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
This page intentionally left blank.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1225
Home
TOC
Index
Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

General Description
The MCC enclosure consists of a strong and rigid steel channel framework assembled into standardized vertical sections and bolted together to form a complete shipping section of up to 80-inch (2032.0 mm) maximum, four structures each. Structures include horizontal and vertical bus, insulation and isolation barriers, horizontal and vertical isolated wiring troughs, cable entrance areas and space for inserting starter and control equipment. All control units, removable or xed mounted, are assembled with CutlerHammer components of proven safety, quality and reliability. All components are wired in accordance with NEC and UL standards. Specically designed bus stabs, insertion guides, handle mechanisms and safety interlocks are added to form a standardized plug-in unit which meets the highest safety standards.
30.1-1
Master TOC
2100 Series Motor Control Center
Ordering Information
Replacement plug-in units should be ordered by description indicating:
s s s s s s s
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Old General Order number/factory order number. MCC model. Type of plug-in unit. Required features. Circuit breaker or fuse rating. Schematic reference, if any. Motor data.
NEMA Classications (ICS 3, Part 1)

Class I Control Centers
A mechanical grouping of combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other units arranged in a convenient assembly. Connections from the common horizontal power bus to the units are included. Interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices is not included. Only diagrams of the individual units are supplied. When master terminal blocks are specied, a sketch showing general location of terminals is provided.
General Description
Introduction
Eatons Cutler-Hammer Freedom and Advantage MCCs provide a convenient method for grouping motor control, as well as associated distribution equipment. Both Freedom and Advantage 2100 Series MCCs may be applied on electrical systems up to 600 V, 50 or 60 Hz, having available fault currents of up to 100,000 amperes rms. Enclosure designs include NEMA 1 Gasketed, NEMA 2, 12 and 3R. All controllers are assembled with Cutler-Hammer components of proven safety, quality and reliability. All components are wired in accordance with NEC and UL standards.
Both Freedom and Advantage 2100 Series MCCs may be applied on electrical systems up to 600 V, 50 or 60 Hz having available fault currents of up to 100,000 amperes rms. Freedom dc Motor Control Centers are available up to 250 Vdc, having available fault currents up to 22,000 amperes rms. Enclosure designs include NEMA 1 Gasketed, 2, 12 and 3R. An ongoing temperature and short circuit design test program, as required by UL 845, ensures a quality product that meets the latest safety codes.
Class II Control Centers

The same as Class I, but designed to form a complete control system. They include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring between units and interlocking provisions to remotely mounted devices. A suitable diagram illustrating operation of the control associated with the motor control center will be provided. When master terminal blocks are specied, the terminal arrangement and required wiring connections are shown on the diagram.
Replacement MCC Units

In addition to fully assembled, freestanding MCC lineups, replacement MCC plug-in units are available for:
s s s s s s s s s
Features
s s s s s
UL label. 42, 65 and 100 kAIC ratings. Molded Case and Air Power Circuit Breakers. Across-the-line, reduced voltage, and solid-state starters. Variable frequency drives and VFD options.
Description
Motor Control Centers (MCCs) provide the best method for grouping motor control as well as associated distribution equipment. Eatons Cutler-Hammer Freedom and Advantage 2100 Series Control Centers are specially designed to operate machinery, industrial processes and commercial building systems.
CA08104001E
Westinghouse 11-300, built from 1950. Westinghouse Type W, built from 1965. Westinghouse Five Star, built from 1975. Westinghouse Series 2100, built since 1986. Westinghouse Advantage, built since 1991. Cutler-Hammer 9800, built from 1956. Cutler-Hammer F10, built from 1972. Cutler-Hammer Freedom, built since 1988. Cutler-Hammer Freedom Series 2100, built since 1995.
NEMA Types of Wiring

Type A includes no terminal blocks. Combination line starters are factory wired and assembled in the structure in the most efcient arrangement. Auxiliary devices can be supplied, wired or unwired as specied. All feeder circuit breaker or fusible disconnect units are in this classication. Type B duplicates Type A except that all control wires terminate at blocks on the side or near the bottom of each unit. Load terminals are all conveniently located adjacent to the control terminal blocks on size 1 units only. Plug-in type terminal blocks are standard for all control wiring. Type C-S all factory supplied control terminals and load terminals for size 1 and 2 starters are brought to a master terminal block located in the structure. Type C-M all factory supplied control terminals and load terminals for size 1 and 2 starters are brought to a master terminal block located in a separate marshaling structure.
A complete plug-in unit for adding to an existing MCC includes the plug-in unit, hinged door, isolating divider pan, and all necessary installation hardware.
Note: Mounting hardware for old CutlerHammer MCCs is sold separately. Since MCC UL 845 standard was established in 1975, most standard replacement plug-in units will have UL labels.
30.1-2 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1226
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Structures
Standard Structure Arrangements

Standard structural height is 90 inches (2286.0 mm) with 9-inch (228.6 mm) horizontal wireways available at top and bottom for wiring. The balance of vertical compartments, 72 inches (1828.8 mm), is available for mounting of control units. This space can provide up to 12 6-inch (152.4 mm) high (X spaces) or any combination thereof.
Note: In the rear of common vertical bus back-to-back structures, the top horizontal wireway is 15 inches (381.0 mm) high and the bottom wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm). This means that back-to-back structures have only 66 inches (1676.4 mm) 11X of usable space in the rear. 72-inch (1828.8 mm) 12X of mounting space is available with a 3-inch (76.2 mm) bottom wireway. two front mounted only structures can be supplied in a back-to-back conguration, allowing 12X rear usable space (depth dimension will increase).
Enclosures
The standard enclosure type is NEMA Type 1 Gasketed General Purpose Indoor. This enclosure is appropriate for installations with normal atmospheric conditions. The NEMA Type 2 Dripproof Indoor employs a special roof panel with a drip shield and water channels. This prevents liquid from dripping onto the front of the control center. The NEMA Type 3R Rainproof and Sleet Resistant Outdoor consists of a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure mounted on a special base with an outdoor house erected around and over it. Non-walk-in, walk-in aisle and tunnel types are available. The NEMA Type 12 Dust-tight and Driptight Indoor has gasketed material around all doors, door cutouts, cover plates, side, top, and back sheets. A gasketed bottom plate is provided with this enclosure. This construction provides maximum protection against airborne matter and dripping liquids. Indoor enclosures comply with NEC UL 845s Two Meter Rule when the bottom of the MCC is at the same level as the operators platform. MCC elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. Handle extensions are optionally available and may be installed on-site.
Special Structures
In addition to the standard 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure, extra wide structures are available in 4-inch (101.6 mm) increments up to 40 inches (1016.0) wide.
Standard Structure Side View
Construction
The standard vertical structure is 90 inches (2286.0 mm) high and 20 inches (508.0 mm) wide. Front mounted only structures can be either 16 inches (406.4 mm) or 21 inches (533.4 mm) deep. Back-to-back unit mounting is 21 inches (533.4 mm) deep. The structure framework is made of 12-gauge formed steel channels. The subframes for the front and rear of each structure are welded. These subframes are then bolted to longitudinal members to form the complete frame which is rigid and self-supporting. Side, back and roof covers of 14-gauge steel are mounted with screw fasteners for quick and easy removal. All doors are 14-gauge steel with a 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) ange to provide a rigid, secure closure for all openings. Doors mounted on removable pin hinges are provided on all unit compartments. Vertical wireways, top horizontal wireways and bottom horizontal wireways are standard. The unit pan forms the top barrier of each unit space. In conjunction with the unit wrapper, this provides isolation between adjacent units and wireways. The guide rails are an integral part of this pan and provide precise alignment of the unit stabs on the vertical bus.
Reduced height structures, in increments of 6 inches (152.4 mm) 1X from 90 to 54 inches (2286.0 to 1371.6 mm), are available for applications with limited access. Another special structure is a transition section between Type W and the Freedom 2100 Series. This structure is 10 inches (254.0 mm) wide to provide for horizontal bus splicing.
Paint
All enclosure parts are thoroughly cleaned and given a phosphatizing treatment to inhibit rust and to prime the metal for the nish coating. A 2 mil thick electrostatic powder paint coat is applied to all surfaces. The paint type and process meets UL 1332 for electrical equipment steel enclosures. All exterior enclosure covers and doors are painted ANSI 61 gray (Munsel No. 8.3G/6.10/0.54). For improved interior visibility, the interior of the enclosure and plug-in units are painted white (Munsel No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).
Vertical Wireway
A vertical wireway is provided in each structure. Located on the right side, it extends the full 90-inch (2286.0 mm) height of the structure. The width of the wireway is 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm) at the rear of the vertical frame members. Overall depth of the wireway is 8 inches (203.2 mm) providing a crosssectional area of nearly 35 square inches (889 square mm) to easily accommodate control and load wiring. Supports are provided at suitable intervals to secure all wiring and cables. The doors swing open 115 and opposite to the unit doors for maximum accessibility. The doors are mounted on concealed removable pin hinges for quick detachment and are secured in the closed position by spring-loaded quarter-turn indicating type fastener.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1227
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
30.1-3
Master TOC
Horizontal Wireways
Bus System
The bus system is designed to efciently distribute power throughout the MCC and provides inherent mechanical strength in the event of faults.
Vertical Bus
Due to the high strength capability of the bus bars, bus bracing at 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes is standard. Optional bracing is available at 42,000 amperes and 100,000 amperes rms. Bus braces are molded from a glassreinforced polyester material which is non-tracking and impervious to moisture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions. The vertical bus is available in ratings of 300, 600, 800 and 1200 amperes for front mounted only, and 600, 800 and 1200 amperes for back-to-back mounted. Vertical bus bars are tin-plated copper only. Vertical bus of the incoming section will match the horizontal bus when applicable.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Top Horizontal Wireway
Vertical Bus Conguration Bottom Horizontal Wireway
The top front horizontal wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm) high and 8 inches (203.2 mm) deep in front mounted only structures and in the front of back-to-back mounted structures. It extends the full width of each structure and is totally isolated from the main horizontal bus. The bottom horizontal wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm) high and extends the full depth of the structure. The entire oor area under the control center is open for unrestricted conduit entry. For top entry, the top wireway can be increased to 15 inches (381.0 mm) high, reducing the bottom wireway height to 3 inches (76.2 mm). For back-to-back unit mounted, the rear top horizontal wireway is 15 inches (381.0 mm) high and 5 inches (127.0 mm) deep. All horizontal wireway openings are covered by doors for increased accessibility. Each door is mounted with removable pin hinges to allow quick detachment.
The vertical bus provides 3-phase power distribution from the main horizontal bus into the vertical compartments. The bus is a unique angular conguration with an L shape for front mounted only structures and a Z shape for back-to-back. These shapes have the inherent mechanical strength to withstand fault stresses. They also provide a smooth stabbing surface for unit connection.
Isolation of the Freedom Series 2100 vertical bus compartment from the unit compartment is accomplished by a full height barrier. This is a single sheet of glass-reinforced polyester with cutouts to allow the unit stabs to engage the vertical bus. Snap-in covers are available for the cutout openings to provide total isolation during maintenance procedures .
Standard Isolation Barrier
36 37 38 39 40
MCC Bus Layout
41 42 43
Standard Isolation Barrier Rear View
CA08104001E

General Description
When insulation and isolation of the vertical bus is required, a labyrinth design barrier, as shown on the next page, is available. This barrier is molded glass-reinforced polyester and forms a labyrinth around the bus bars to prevent fault propagation. This design provides maximum protection against phase-to-phase insulation breakdown. Thermal efciency is maintained by a close tolerance t between the bus bars and the barrier which minimizes air pockets. The labyrinth barrier is standard for Advantage MCCs. An automatic shutter mechanism is standard with the labyrinth barrier to provide complete isolation of the vertical bus. The shutter moves automatically to cover the stab openings when a unit is removed. This provides maintenance personnel with maximum protection since the vertical bus is never exposed. As the unit is reinserted in the compartment, the shutter moves sideways to uncover the stab openings in the barrier.
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1228
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Horizontal Bus
Neutral Assemblies
Neutral Bus (Bottom) Horizontal Bus
The main horizontal bus provides 3-phase power distribution from the incoming line or primary disconnect device to each vertical structure in the motor control center. The bus bars are mounted in a vertical plane, edge to edge. This mounting produces an exceptionally strong assembly, able to withstand high fault current stresses. Standard horizontal bus bracing is 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical amperes. Optional bracing is available at 100,000 amperes rms. Bus braces are molded from high strength glassreinforced polyester material which is non-tracking and impervious to moisture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions. The main horizontal bus is rated at 600 amperes as standard with ratings of 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 amperes optionally available. Tin-plated copper bus bars are supplied as standard. Silver-plated copper is also available.
Note: 3200 ampere horizontal bus available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65C rise above 40C ambient only.
For 3-phase 4-wire applications, a neutral landing pad is provided as standard. This is a 100% rated neutral. As an option, half or fully rated neutral bus can be supplied in the bottom of the entire MCC.
Ground Bus
Ground Bus (Top)
Copper ground bus, rated 300 amperes 1/4-inch by 1-inch (6.4 mm by 25.4 mm) is supplied as standard. Mounting is across the top of each vertical structure in the horizontal wireway. The bus can also be mounted across the bottom when the bottom 9 inches (228.6 mm) are not occupied by units or master terminal blocks. A 1/4-inch by 2-inch (6.4 mm by 50.8 mm) copper ground bus rated 600 amperes is optional.
Labyrinth Barrier with Automatic Shutter Mechanism
The horizontal main bus is isolated from the top horizontal wireway compartment by an isolation barrier. This two-piece steel barrier extends to the full width of each vertical structure. The two-piece design allows access to bus connections without the removal of the entire barrier, for added maintenance convenience. The bus bar layout permits front access to all bus connections. This allows maintenance personnel to make splices and check splice bolt torques from the front of the structure.
An optional 300 ampere vertical tin-plated only copper ground bus is available. Located in the vertical wireway, it provides direct starter unit grounding.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1229
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
30.1-5
Master TOC
Units
General
Motor starter units are combination type employing a linestarter and a disconnect device of proven capability. The disconnect device can be a motor circuit protector, circuit breaker or fusible switch. Eatons Cutler-Hammer Type HMCP motor circuit protector is furnished as standard. All starters through NEMA Size 5 are a drawout design except Size 5 electromechanical reduced voltage. All dimensions and ratings in the following tables are based on NEMA B, 1800 RPM motors. The HMCP and starter combination has a 65,000 rms symmetrical ampere short circuit current rating as standard at 480 V. Starter units are available with optional 100,000 ampere short circuit current rating. Series C thermalmagnetic circuit breakers (65 kAIC, or optional 100 kAIC) for starter units are also available. Freedom and Advantage starters meet or exceed IEC 947-4 Type II testing with R and J fuses. Additionally, Advantage is Type II listed with Cutler-Hammer motor circuit protector disconnects. The fusible switch disconnect device is the Type K. It is a quick-make, quickbreak, visible blade switch with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual element, rejection type, NEMA Class J or R fuses. Rejection fuse clips for Class RK-5 fuses are standard. Fuses are not included as standard. Both breaker and fuse selection must take into consideration the total short circuit capacity of the system to which the control center is connected. Typical starter units available include the following:
s s s s s s s s
Units Freedom Starter
Units ac Drives
22 23 24 25 26
Freedom FVNR Starter
Freedom Series 2100 starter units are equipped with Cutler-Hammer Freedom starters and contactors NEMA Sizes 1 through 5. Size 6 and 7 starters are A200 type. These contactors have been successfully applied in thousands of the most demanding industrial applications. Overload protection is provided by a 3-pole adjustable ambient compensated, bi-metallic thermal overload relay. The overload relay also provides single-phase sensitivity and isolated alarm contact. An insulated hand reset button extends through the compartment door. Additionally, motor running data and starter status/control are available through DeviceNet systems.
27 28 29 30 31
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Units Advantage Starter
Full voltage, non-reversing. Full voltage, reversing. Two-speed, single winding and two winding. Reduced voltage, autotransformer, closed transition. Reduced voltage, wye delta. Reduced voltage, part winding. Reduced voltage, solid state. Adjustable frequency drives.
Advantage FVNR Starter
Each starter includes a stainless steel corrosion-resistant safety ground clip that makes connection before the power stabs engage the vertical bus.
Advantage starter units are equipped with Cutler-Hammer Advantage starters NEMA sizes 1 through 6. Introduced in 1991, the Advantage starter has been successfully applied in the most demanding industrial applications. Utilizing a microprocessor control, the Advantage starter affords phase unbalance protection, ground fault protection, more accurate motor overload protection, discrete pickup and dropout voltages and inherent coil surge protection. Additionally, motor running data and starter status/control are available through PowerNet and DeviceNet communications systems.
Adjustable Frequency Drives are available from .5 hp to 1100 hp for control of standard ac motors in processes that benet from the ability to change motor speed. Use of Inverter Duty motors is recommended. Controllers are available to handle constant torque applications, such as conveyors and crushers, and variable torque applications, such as fans and pumps. Control schemes are available for volts/Hz, open loop vector and closed loop vector models. SVX9000 drive units include as standard: line reactors and a door mounted keypad. Units up to 150 hp VT have a standard output reactor for V/DT ltering. MVX drive units include as standard: a line reactor, viewing window for drive display, and an output lter. All drive structures are bus connected which allows for expansion of the MCC on both sides of the structure. A wide range of AFD features and options are available to meet the requirements of most applications. AFDs are available in NEMA 1A gasketed enclosures.
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1230
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Units Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
Feeder Tap Units
is welded to the stabs and is totally contained within the unit enclosure. This means the vertical bus compartment is completely free of wiring for maximum safety and reliability. Stab assemblies are accurately matched to the electrical requirements of each individual unit and are provided in 60, 150, 300 or 400 ampere ratings (plug-in through Size 5).
Handle Mechanism
Dual Feeder Tap Unit
IT. SSRV Starter Unit
IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage (SSRV) Starters are designed to reduce the inrush current to a motor during starting and limit the amount of available starting torque, thus reducing mechanical wear and utility demand requirements. The amount of starting current is eld adjustable to match the specic requirements of all applications.
Eatons IT. SSRV Controllers are available with a wide variety of standard features: Kick start, soft stop, phase loss and stall protection. IT. SSRV Starters are 30 70% smaller than competitive designs. Typical applications include conveyors, compressors, machine tools, pumps and fans.
Feeder tap units may contain either circuit breakers or fusible switches. Drawout breaker units include the xed trip Type HFD, single or dual mounted in ratings through 150 amperes and the interchangeable trip Types HJD and HKD single mounted through 250 and 400 amperes respectively. Larger Series C circuit breakers with ratings to 2500 amperes are xed mounted. Fusible feeder tap units utilize the Cutler-Hammer Type K visible blade disconnect switch. Fused switches are mounted in drawout units through 400 amperes with 30 and 60 ampere ratings available in dual mountings. Fixed mounted switch ratings of 600 and 800 amperes are also available. All switches are supplied with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual-element rejection type. Types of fuses include Class J, R or L.
Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanism
The handle mechanism is designed to provide a high mechanical leverage so that little effort is required to operate any device. The standard handle mechanism is a vertical motion type device with four positions: ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET. Only circuit breaker types have tripped and reset positions. It is securely mounted to the front of the unit and mechanically connected to the breaker or fusible switch, eliminating alignment problems. It provides a positive indication of the breaker or switch position, even with the door open.
Units dc Starters
Stab Assembly
Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs dc Starter Unit
UL listed dc MCCs use combination circuit breaker dc starters suitable for motor starting duty only. Using CutlerHammer Type ME dc denite purpose contactors, all dc starters are suitable for up to 250 Vdc and have a 22 kA withstand rating. Class 135 starting resistors for reduced voltage starters are sized for 200% starting current. Typical applications include emergency lube oil pumps, emergency seal oil pumps and emergency turning gear motors.
A tin-plated copper alloy stab incorporates the ultimate in mechanical simplicity to provide precise control of contact pressure on the bus. This ensures a positive connection yet permits easy unit insertion and withdrawal. Self-aligning stabs are mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic insulation block which totally shrouds each stab and absolutely ensures positive alignment of the stabs with the vertical bus. The insulation block is also an integral part of the phase-tophase isolation system. Power wiring
Unit Insertion Interlock
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1231
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
30.1-7
Master TOC
The handle and exterior front panel are molded from the same plastic material as the device panel. A textured surface preserves the appearance. The ON position indicator is at the top and is a bright red. The OFF/RESET position is at the bottom and is bright green. The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is in the middle, between the ON and OFF position. All position indicator colors contrast with the black background and are highly visible even at considerable distances. The operating handle is designed for rugged duty and solid operator feel.
Device Panel
Nameplates
Unit nameplates are engraved with 3/16-inch (4.8 mm) high white lettering on a black background (black lettering on a white background optional). They are heat and crack resistant to eliminate the need for replacement. Nameplates are mounted with stainless steel self-tapping screws.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Unit Wrapper
Standard Device Panel
Padlocking Bar
Advantage Device Panel with ACM and Metering Module
31
Plug-in Unit Wrapper
The handle mechanism provides several safety features:

s
In the ON position, an interlock prevents the unit door from being opened. A door interlock defeater screw located above the handle is provided to enable authorized maintenance personnel access to the units when required. s With the unit door open and the operating handle in the ON position, an interlock slides into a slot in the divider pan above and prevents removal of the unit. This same interlock prevents insertion of the unit unless the handle mechanism is in the OFF position. The interlock also prevents the operating handle from being turned on with the unit door open. s To ensure that units are not energized accidentally or by unauthorized personnel, the handle mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. Sufcient space is available for a maximum of three padlocks. Where critical processes are involved and to prevent unauthorized shutdown, the handle mechanism can be modied to enable padlocking in the ON position.
The device panel can accommodate up to six 1-3/16-inch (30.2 mm) Eatons Cutler-Hammer 10250T type pilot devices such as oiltight pushbuttons, indicating lights, selector switches and miniature meters. Molded into the panel is a knockout for each device location. This facilitates the future addition of devices to the panel. The device panel is hinged on a horizontal pivot tube extending across the front of the unit. With the unit door open, loosening two captive retaining screws at the top of the panel and sliding it 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) left, permits it to swing down. This provides ready access to the rear of the panel and increased accessibility to the unit interior.
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
The unit wrapper is fabricated of 14-gauge steel. After fabrication, it is cleaned and given a rust inhibiting phosphatizing treatment. The nish on a unit wrapper is a baked Munsel No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23 white. This is highly durable nish, gloss-white in color to increase visibility within the unit and facilitate wiring and maintenance procedures. The unit wrapper consists of a threesided rugged steel shell including the mounting base for the unit components. The smallest unit measures 13-3/4 inches (349.3 mm) wide, 8 inches (203.2 mm) deep and 6 inches (152.4 mm) high. Units increase in 6-inch (152.4 mm) increments to a maximum height of 72 inches (1828.8 mm). The unit wrapper is designed to provide ample space for cable entry from the wireway to the unit.
CA08104001E

General Description
The unit wrapper has four mounting points, two on each side, which support the unit in the structure. They engage guide rails located near the top of each unit space. This mounting point guide rail system produces minimum friction and allows units to be inserted and withdrawn easily. The guide rails also give precise alignment to the unit for accurate stabbing on the vertical bus.
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1232
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Terminal Blocks
A side mounted, seven-circuit, latching pull-apart terminal block is standard on units with NEMA Type B or C wiring. This industrial grade Cutler-Hammer MCC terminal block provides solid electrical connections while conserving space and making installation and maintenance easier. Terminal blocks are mounted in knockouts on the vertical wireway side of the unit housing affording greater access to the unit compartment and interior components. The two-piece terminal block snap-locks together to ensure permanent circuit continuity. To aid installation and wiring checks, the terminal marking strips for both sides of the terminal block are fully visible from the front of the starter compartment.
Control wiring within each starter compartment consists of 16 AWG control wire for Freedom 2100 Series MCCs and 14 AWG wire for Advantage 2100 Series MCCs. Rated 105C, the ame-retardant, thermoplastic insulated wire is red. Power wiring is black and sized to carry the maximum full load current of the starter unit.
Front Rail Mounted Terminal Blocks

For special applications, other types of rail mounted terminal blocks are also available. They are installed horizontally at the bottom front of the starter unit. Refer to Eaton for terminal block types available and space restrictions.
Unit Doors
Unit Wrapper Latch
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
At the top center of the unit wrapper is a quarter-turn latch which securely holds the unit in the compartment. The latch can only be engaged when the stabs are fully mated with the vertical bus. Upon release of the latch, the unit can be partially withdrawn such that the stabs disengage from the vertical bus. In this position, the latch can be re-engaged to prevent the unit from being returned to the fully stabbed position or from being removed from the structure. The latch can be padlocked in this position to ensure that the stabs remain disengaged during maintenance.
Side Mounted Latched Pull-Apart Terminal Block
12-Inch (304.8 mm) Unit Door
Unit Maintenance
Heavy-duty saddle wire terminals are of the resilient collar design which eliminates loose connections caused by expansion and contracting of the conductor as the current is switched on and off. This unique design maintains constant pressure as the wire expands and contracts. This 600 V, 30 A rated terminal block will accept 12 AWG stripped wires, as well as 14 AWG ring or spade wire lugs. All terminal block conductors are fully shielded for added safety and cleanliness. A 12-inch (304.8 mm) high (2X space) starter unit accommodates up to three side-mounted terminal blocks providing a maximum of 21 points. Larger units accommodate two additional 7-point terminal blocks for every additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) 1X space of unit height. The 6-inch (152.4 mm) compact starter unit uses a 9-point pull-apart terminal block which is installed along the top front of the starter unit.
Unit doors are formed of 14-gauge steel with a 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) ange on all four sides. The ange adds rigidity to the door and provides a surface to contain door gasketing. Cutouts are made in the door as required to accommodate the operating handle and device panel. The doors are cleaned, phosphatized and given a nish of gray, baked on enamel ANSI 61. The doors will open 115 opposite to the wireway doors permitting optimum access to the unit compartment. The doors are mounted on removable concealed pin hinges. This permits quick removal of any door in a vertical structure without disturbing adjacent doors. Doors 2X and larger are held closed with a minimum of two quarter-turn indicating type fasteners. They securely hold the door in the closed position, yet allow quick and easy access to the unit when required. The fasteners provide a visual indication of the latched position. The head slot of the fastener is designed to prevent screwdriver slippage.
Plug-in Unit Maintenance
The three-piece unit wrapper design facilitates easy work bench maintenance. When removed from the MCC, the unit top/side barrier assembly can easily be swiveled up and back for complete access to components and wiring.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1233
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
s s s s s s s s s s
30.1-9
Master TOC
MVX and SV9000 adjustable frequency controllers. Active Harmonic Correction Units. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) units. Size 4, 5 and 6 vacuum starters and contactors. Power factor correction capacitors. Automatic transfer switches. DeviceNet Communications. PowerNet Communications. PanelMate industrial Operator Interface. Industrial PCs.
Master terminal blocks are rack mounted to permit removal of entire assembly for ease of wiring during installation and maintenance. For NEMA Type C-M wiring control and size 1 and 2 starter load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located in a separate marshaling structure.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Incoming Line
Incoming line cables entering the MCC from either the top or bottom can be easily terminated onto main lugs or connected to a main disconnect. All incoming line sections comply with NEC wiring bending requirements as adopted by UL.
Spring-Loaded Unit Door 1/4 Turn Latch
Control and Load Terminations
Options
Eatons Cutler-Hammer starter and feeder tap units can be modied to meet a variety of specication requirements. Some typical components which can be added include: control power transformers with two primary and one secondary control fuses, control relays, CEP7 or IQ 500 (solid-state overload) relays, ground fault relays, current transformers, extra electrical interlocks, pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, circuit breaker shunt trip or undervoltage release and auxiliary switches. In most cases, one of these modications does not increase starter unit size.
Main Lugs Only (MLO)

Up to 1200 ampere rated horizontal bus, cables, up to four per phase, are terminated on crimp or screw lugs mounted on adapters solidly bolted to fully rated vertical bus. Top entry cables are terminated at the top of the MCC and bottom entry cables are conveniently terminated near the bottom. Table 30.1-83 shows spacing requirements for various cable congurations. MLO termination for 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 amperes requires a full vertical section.
Note: 3200 ampere main lugs only available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65C rise above 40C ambient only.
Master Terminal Blocks at Bottom (Class C Wiring)
Additional Equipment
In addition to motor starter and feeder units, additional equipment can be supplied including the following:
s
For NEMA Type A wiring each unit is assembled and devices interwired. Terminal blocks are not supplied and control and load wiring is internal to the unit. For NEMA Type B wiring, control wires are terminated at blocks within the unit. Refer to the discussion of units for types of terminal blocks available. For NEMA Type C-S wiring, control, and size 1 and 2 starter load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located at the top or bottom of each vertical structure. The mounting location of the master terminal block in front mounted only structures is in the existing horizontal wireway space at the top or at the bottom as shown above. When mounting is made in an incoming line section, 12 inches (304.8 mm) of unit space must be used. When mounting is made in the rear of back-to-back mounted structures, 6 inches (152.4 mm) of unit space must be used at the bottom and 12 inches (304.8 mm) at the top.
Main Disconnects
Incoming cables may also be easily terminated on a main circuit breaker or fused switch. A variety of molded case or encased circuit breakers are available. Tables 30.1-60 through 30.1-66 show spacing requirements for various main devices.
s s
Single-phase dry-type distribution transformers in ratings of .5, .75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 and 45 kVA. 3-phase dry-type distribution transformers in ratings of 9, 15, 25, 30 and 45 kVA. Lighting panelboards with up to 42 circuits with either plug-in branch breakers or bolt-on branch breakers, 120/240 V, 120/208 V or 480 V, singleor 3-phase. Current limiting reactors with ohmic values of .01, .015, .02 and .025, and ampere ratings of 600, 800, 1000 and 1200. Metering equipment including the IQ family of solid-state power monitors, voltmeters and ammeters. PLC and DCS I/O racks. IT. family of solid-state reduced voltage starters.
CA08104001E

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1234
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Metering
Communications PowerNet
Communications DeviceNet
IQ Analyzer
Central Monitoring Unit
DeviceNet Wiring
Eatons Cutler-Hammer IQ family of metering and power monitors includes: IQ 320 microprocessor-based 3-phase power monitor replaces the traditional ammeter, voltmeter and instrument switches. Displays phase currents, voltage, L-L, L-N, power-real and reactive apparent, power factor, frequency, energy: watthours, varhours, VA-hours. IQ 200 includes all of the functions of the IQ 320 meter. The door mounted display is smaller, making the IQ 200 ideal for use on individual starter and drive units. IQ DP-4000 includes all of the functions of the IQ 320 plus THD readings for voltage and current. Additionally, the IQ DP-4130 includes contact inputs and outputs. This device is ideal for incoming line monitoring. IQ Analyzer provides extensive metering, power quality analysis, remote input monitoring, control relaying, analog input/outputs, and is communications capable. A display provides the exibility of exhibiting large characters with high visibility and small characters for detailed descriptions. These IQ power monitors each contain their own voltage power pack for systems up to 600 V. Therefore, separate potential transformers are not required. Either two or three separate current transformers must be used. All IQ power monitors are communications capable. Refer to Section 3 for further details. Power Xpert is a meter available with communication features for power management and system software integration in addition to a Web interface. Customers and facility personnel can view the metering data using a standard PC Web browser. The new platform offers advanced functionality like transient capture, high sampling rate, open communications, Web server gateway, eld-upgradable rmware, expandable memory and optional I/O.
The Advantage MCC is available with the PowerNet communications network. PowerNet network capable devices, such as Advantage starters, the IQ family of metering devices, addressable relays, energy sentinels and many others, can be connected together with one twisted pair PowerNet communications network. Advantage starters may be controlled and monitored from remote locations. 3-phase motor running current, control voltage, elapsed time, start count and overload status information is available on the network. Central Monitoring Unit (CMU) For Advantage MCCs, a Central Monitoring Unit can be installed to provide centralized motor monitoring for an entire MCC. Using a PowerNet communications network, all Advantage starters with WPONI network modules are serially connected to the CMU via one shielded twisted pair network. At the CMU, motor running data as well as start/stop and overload status can be conveniently monitored.
Advantage MCCs are available with DeviceNet Communications. DeviceNet is a device level open communication network linking DeviceNet capable control products, such as Advantage Starters, Freedom Starters, Adjustable Frequency Drives, PanelMate 1700 Series and operator interfaces, DN50 I/O blocks, IT. soft starters and iPCs. These products are prewired in the MCC with DeviceNet cable. Available control and monitoring features of Advantage Starters and SVX9000 drives include:
s s s s s s s s s
ON/OFF control. Control voltage. Trip reset. Trip indication. Cause of trip. Thermal capacity. 3-phase or average motor current. Various drive parameters. Overload warning.
Parameters Displayed
s
Monitored values: u Device description u IA, IB, IC currents u Control voltage u Present time, date u Resettable operation unit u Run time, hours
Available control and monitoring features of Freedom Starters and IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters include: ON/OFF control. Overload trip indication. s RUN status. s Disconnect status.
s s
Trip data current values and cause of trip. s Set points: u Device size u OL trip current setting (FLA setting) u OL trip class u Ground fault protection ON/OFF u Phase loss/unbalance protection ON/OFF u Reset mode Auto/Manual Frequency
s
The DeviceNet specication is controlled by the Open Device Vendors Association (ODVA). The DeviceNet system can be controlled from: iPC (industrial personal computer) PC-based control software. s DeviceNet scanner cards designed for leading PLC and DCS systems.
s
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1235
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
30.1-11
Master TOC
Harmonic Correction
Load(s)
Additional Services
Startup Assistance
To ensure complete customer satisfaction and to expedite equipment startup for Motor Control Centers, this service provides a factory-trained representative at the job-site during equipment energization. This service is provided on a xed price basis. In addition to factory directed startup, the standard equipment warranty is extended for a period of 24 months. This service is especially benecial when solid-state equipment is incorporated within the MCC due to the exibility in adjusting solid-state equipment for each application.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Source XFMR Typical CT Placement
Alternate CT Placement
Harmonic Correction Unit
Maintenance and Operational Training

A full range of Training and Operational Training programs are available for all types of MCC mounted equipment. In addition, Preventative Maintenance programs are available to ensure years of trouble-free operation.
Figure 30.1-1. Clean Control Center Installation Diagram The Clean Control Center utilizes a harmonic correction unit to provide harmonic cancellation directly on the Motor Control Center Horizontal Bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and injects into the ac lines a synthesized waveform that is inverted compared to the remaining signal. The result is a clean waveform as seen by the upstream electrical system. Single or multiple harmonic correction units may be applied within a Clean Control Center providing an economical solution to excessive harmonics due to ac drives or other nonlinear loads. Use of the Clean Control Center will provide compliance to the most stringent 5% Total Demand Distortion (TDD) requirements of IEEE 519. Clean Control Center assemblies include a 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCC structure, Active Harmonic Correction Unit, Current Transformers and a door-mounted digital interface panel.
Motor Protection
The Eatons Cutler-Hammer CEP7 SolidState Overload Relay offers improved motor protection due to high repeat accuracy and fast reaction times to phase failures. The state-of-the-art microelectronics design permits the choice of relays with different trip classes (Class 10, 20) to accommodate motors with a variety of application needs. The CEP7 and CEP7B Solid-State overloads are available on all Freedom starter sizes. (Size 5 and up utilize CTs with the overload relay.) Key features include:
s s s s s s s
Seismic Qualication
Seismic testing has been completed for Freedom and Advantage MCCs. When specied, Freedom and Advantage MCCs are seismically qualied to meet the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC).
Retrots
Existing installations can many times benet from some of the new technology equipment available in todays MCCs. Eaton offers a full range of retrot capabilities to upgrade existing MCC lineups. Examples include: vacuum contactors, reduced voltage solid-state starters, solid-state metering and solid-state overload protection. Starter retrot kits for selective competitor MCCs are also available. Consult factory for availability.
PLCs
Programmable Controllers can be mounted in Freedom Series 2100 and Advantage MCCs in a wide variety of congurations. Popular mounting congurations include small PLCs unit mounted to replace relays, medium sized PLCs with I/O for control of an MCC lineup, and remote I/O drops mounted in an MCC and connected to the main CPU via coaxial cable. Due to the exibility of PLCs and the wide variety of applications and congurations, the Freedom Series 2100 and Advantage MCCs are designed to meet the mounting requirements of most applications.
Phase loss Phase imbalance Wide adjustment range Low energy usage Reduced heat Jam/stall protection (CEP7B) Ground fault (CEP7B, opens starter only)
The MP-3000 Motor Overload Relay is a microprocessor-based relay which provides superior motor protection for critical process motors. Standard protective features provided in the MP-3000 include: I2t with programmable locked rotor protection, instantaneous overcurrent, ground fault, underload, jam, phase loss/unbalance/reversal, limit starts/hr, alarm and trip modes and capability to utilize RTDs for motor protection. Functions are user programmed via a data entry and display panel mounted in the door of the Freedom Series 2100. Alarm and Trip contacts are provided for remote indication. In addition, the MP-3000 will have the capability for remote monitoring via a communications port. The ultimate in motor protection is available in the MP-3000 and the Series 2100 MCC.
CA08104001E

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1236
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
2100 Series Motor Control Center

Quick Reference Layout Guide Index
Device Space Requirements Combination Starters, Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Starters, Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option Groups for Combination Starters, Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Vdc Combination Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TVSS (Clipper Power System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DeviceNet Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth Leakage Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering and Protection Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Harmonic Correction Clean Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Structures and Structure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Lugs Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Power Transformer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC Ratings and Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protector, Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Views/Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 30.1-2 30.1-16 30.1-25 30.1-27 30.1-33 30.1-56 30.1-60 30.1-66 30.1-67 30.1-70 30.1-71 30.1-72 30.1-73 30.1-74 30.1-75 30.1-76 30.1-78 30.1-79 30.1-80 30.1-81 30.1-82 30.1-83 30.1-85 30.1-87 30.1-88 30.1-89 30.1-90 Page 30.1-13 30.1-18 30.1-22 30.1-23 30.1-26 30.1-29 30.1-30 30.1-32 30.1-32 30.1-32 30.1-33 30.1-33 30.1-33 30.1-33 30.1-33 30.1-34 30.1-34 30.1-34 30.1-36 30.1-36 30.1-37 30.1-37 30.1-38 30.1-38 30.1-39 30.1-40 30.1-40 30.1-45
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1237
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.1-13
Master TOC
Technical Data
Table 30.1-1. Short Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480 Volts)
Short Circuit Protective Device HMCP Motor Circuit Protector (Standard Rating) HMCP Motor Circuit Protector (Optional Rating) MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Standard Rating) MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Optional Rating) Fusible Switch Combination Starter FV and RV (kA) 65 100 65 100 100 Solid-State Reduced Voltage (kA) 65 100 65 100 Adjustable Frequency Drives (kA) 65 100 65 100 100
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.1-2. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers Dimensions in Inches (mm) Motor Circuit Protector Ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efciency) motors. Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V HMCP Frame MCCB Frame Freedom Unit Size Inches (mm) Advantage Unit Size Inches (mm)
X Space 1X 2X 3X 2X 3X 3X 4X 3X 4X 6X 8X 12X 12X 3X 3X 3X 4X 3X 4X 4X 5X 10X 12X 12X
X Space 1X 2X 3X 1X 2X 3X 2X 3X 4X 2X 3X 4X 6X 7X 10X 12X 3X 3X 3X 4X 3X 4X 6X 5X 10X 12X 12X
Full Voltage Non-Reversing

HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HND HND HFD/FDC HFD/FDC
Type F206
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Type W206
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 42 (1066.8) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.8)
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
150
10
15
25
25
25
150
25
30
50
50
50
150
4 5 6 7 1 2
40 50 75 25 150 7.5 10
50 60 100 100 200 300 7.5 15
75 100 150 250 300 10 25
100 125 200 300 350 400 600 10 25
100 150 200 400 600 10 25
150 250 400 600 1200 1200 150 150
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Dual Unit
Type F246
18 (457.2) 18 (457.2)
Type W246
18 (457.2) 18 (457.2)
Full Voltage Reversing

1 2 3 4 5 6

Type F216
7.5 15 30 50 60 100 100 200 10 25 50 75 100 150 250 300 10 25 50 100 125 200 300 400 10 25 50 100 150 200 400 150 150 150 150 250 400 600 1200 HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HND 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Type W216
18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
7.5 10 25 40 50 75 125 150
Standard Combination Starter Units with HMCP Magnetic Only disconnect have short circuit ratings of 65,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional HMCP combination starter units are available with 100,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional Combination Starter Units with Thermal-Magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 amperes or 100,000 amperes at 480 volts. Maximum of (3) pilot devices, (2) auxiliary contacts; 100 VA CPT maximum. Standard lugs only. 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard. 18-inch (457.2 mm)/3X unit is standard. Minimum 30-inch (762.0 mm) space needed with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker. Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. Limited options. Two starter units share common door. 30-inch (762.0 mm) space needed for Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker. For top entry, 8X space required. 1200 ampere HMCP frame available in 11X 66-inch (1676.4 mm). Requires 36-inch (914.4 mm) wide structure. Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.
Note: For HMCP continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.1-88 on Page 30.1-39.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1238
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.1-2. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Continued)
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208 V 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 1PW 2PW 3PW 7.5 10 25 40 50 75 7.5 10 25 30 40 50 75 10 25 30 50 75 150 10 20 40 60 75 100 150 20 30 40 60 100 150 20 40 60 100 150 240 V 7.5 15 30 50 60 100 7.5 15 30 40 50 60 100 15 30 50 60 100 200 300 10 25 50 60 75 125 150 25 40 50 75 125 150 25 50 75 125 150 380 V 10 25 50 75 100 150 10 25 50 60 75 100 150 25 50 75 100 150 300 15 40 75 125 150 250 40 75 125 150 200 250 40 125 150 200 250 480 V 10 25 50 100 125 200 10 25 50 75 100 125 200 25 50 100 125 200 400 600 15 40 75 100 150 250 350 40 75 150 250 300 40 150 250 300 600 V 10 25 50 100 150 200 10 25 50 100 150 200 25 50 100 150 200 400 600 15 40 75 125 150 300 350 40 5 150 300 40 150 300 150 150 150 150 250 400 150 150 150 150 250 250 400 150 150 150 250 400 600 1200 150 150 150 150 250 400 400 600 150 150 250 250 400 400 600 150 250 250 400 400 600 HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HND HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HMCP Frame MCCB Frame Freedom Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 4X 4X 6X 6X 12X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 12X 6X 8X 9X 12X 12X 12X 4X 4X 5X Advantage Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 4X 4X 6X 6X 12X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 12X 6X 9X 9X 12X 12X 12X 4X 4X 5X
Two-Speed One Winding, Constant/Variable Torque
Type F946
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 72 (1828.8)
Type W946
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 72 (1828.8)
Two-Speed Two Winding, Constant/Variable Torque
Type F956
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 72 (1828.8)
Type W956
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 72 (1828.8)
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer
Type F606
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Type W606
36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Reduced Voltage Part Winding
Type F706
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
Type W706
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
4PW 5PW 2YD 3YD 4YD 5YD 2YD 3YD 4YD 5YD

36 (914.4) 72 (1828.8)
6X 12X 5X 7X 8X 12X 7X 9X 10X 12X
36 (914.4) 72 (1828.8)
6X 12X 5X 7X 7X 12X 7X 9X 10X 12X
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open Transition
Type F806
30 (762.0) 42 (1066.8) 48 (1219.2) 72 (1828.8)
Type W806
30 (762.0) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 72 (1828.8)
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed Transition
Type F896
42 (1066.8) 54 (1371.6) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.8)
Type W896
42 (1066.8) 54 (1371.6) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.8)
Standard Combination Starter Units with HMCP Magnetic Only disconnect have short circuit ratings of 65,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional HMCP combination starter units are available with 100,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional Combination Starter Units with Thermal-Magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 amperes or 100,000 amperes at 480 volts. Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed disconnect. 42-inch (1066.8 mm) space needed with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker. 48-inch (1219.2 mm) space needed with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker. Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. 36-inch (914.4 mm) space needed for Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker. Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. For starting speed disconnect, add 6-inch (152.4 mm) space.
Note: For HMCP motor circuit protectors continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.1-88 on Page 30.1-39.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1239
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.1-15
Master TOC
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Start Controller S701

Eatons solid-state reduced voltage soft start controller uses a manual motor protector, main disconnect in conjunction with the soft start controller. Units can be supplied with one controller or with four or six controllers fed from one main disconnect. Table 30.1-3. Soft Start Controller Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Ampere Rating 3.5 15 25 Maximum Horsepower 208 V 1 3 5 230 V 1 3 5 460 V 2 7.5 15 575 V 2 10 20 HMCP Values 7 30 50 Unit Size Inches (mm) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter HMCP S752

Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. soft starter has three 24 Vdc inputs and one transistor output. IT. soft starter units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.1-4. Standard Duty Ratings Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Ampere Rating 4.4 9 16 27 50
IT. Width (mm)

54
Maximum Horsepower 208 V 0.75 2 3 7.5 15 230 V 1 2 3 7.5 15 460 V 2 5 10 20 30 575 V 3 7.5 10 25 40
HMCP Values 7 15 30 50 70
30 31 32
Table 30.1-5. Severe Duty Ratings Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect

IT. Width (mm)

54
Maximum Horsepower 208 V 0.75 2 2 3 7.5 230 V 1 2 2 5 10 460 V 2 5 5 10 20 575 V 3 7.5 7.5 15 30
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.1-6. Control Options

Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer Line or Load MOV Protection Bypass Starter Isolation Contractor
Bypass starter or isolation contactor options will t in (3X) 18-inch (457.2 mm) units.
Table 30.1-7. Group-Mounted Controller Option

Maximum Horsepower per Unit at 480 V 2 2 7.5 7.5 Number of Units 4 6 4 6 Unit Size Inches (mm) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4)
CA08104001E

Technical Data Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter HMCP Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs
when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.1-8. Standard Duty Ratings Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1240
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection

A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load amperes. s A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load amperes. (15% more current.) s IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below.
s HMCP/ MCCB Frame 100 100 150 150 250 250 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 1200 1200 1200 2000 150 150 150 225 250 250 400 400 600 600 600 600 800 1200 1200 1200 2000 Unit Size Inches (mm) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2)
Ampere IT. Width Maximum Horsepower or (kW) Rating (mm) 208 V 240 V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
380 V 1.15 SF 15 30 45 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 315 375 500 15 30 45 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 315 375 500
1.0 SF 18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 375 500 560 18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 375 500 560
480 V 1.15 SF 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700
1.0 SF 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 600 700 800 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 600 700 800
600 V 1.15 SF 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900
1.0 SF 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000
HMCP
37 66 105 135 135 180 180 240 304 304 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000 37 66 105 135 180 180 240 304 304 360 420 500 650 650 720 850 1000

65 110
200
290
290
290 65 110 200
10 15 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 200 200 10 15 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 200 200
10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250
10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
36 (914.4)
54 (1371.6)
72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 36 (914.4)
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect
290
72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
Standard duty ampere rating. See rating chart below. Consult factory for width of unit. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).
Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 30.1-9. Option Sizing Dimensions in Inches (mm)

IT. Width Disconnect (mm) Type Isolating Contactor HMCP, MCCB 65 HMCP, MCCB 110 HMCP, MCCB 110 HMCP, MCCB 200 HMCP, MCCB 290 HMCP, MCCB 290 Bypass Starter HMCP, MCCB 65 HMCP, MCCB 110 HMCP, MCCB 110 HMCP, MCCB 200 HMCP, MCCB 290 HMCP, MCCB 290

Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 24 Vdc Control Line or Load MOV Protection Pump Control Option DeviceNet Communications Module

Starter Size 1,2,3 3,4 5 5,6 6 7 1,2,3 3,4 5 5,6 6 7
Option Unit Size 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Structure Width 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 32 (812.8) 48 (1219.2) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 24 (609.6) 32 (812.8) 48 (1219.2)
Option ts in standard unit space. Option adds 6 inches (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
Table 30.1-11. Standard Duty Ratings

Ramp Current % of FLA 300% 500% 350% 480% 390% 300% Ramp Time 30 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 20 Seconds 20 Seconds 20 Seconds Starts Per Hour 3 3 3 2 3 4 Similar to Starting Method Soft Start Full Voltage Wye Delta 80% RVAT 65% RVAT 50% RVAT
Option ts in standard unit space.
Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1241
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection
30.1-17
Master TOC
IT06 Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter HMCP Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.1-12. Severe Duty Ratings Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Ampere IT. Width Maximum Horsepower or (kW) Rating (mm) 208 V 240 V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 380 V 1.15 SF 7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220 7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220
s HMCP/ MCCB Frame Unit Size Inches (mm)
22 23 24 25 26
1.0 SF 11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250
480 V 1.15 SF 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450
1.0 SF 15 30 50 60 75 100 125 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 15 30 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
600 V 1.15 SF 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500
1.0 SF 20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600
HMCP
22 42 65 80 80 115 150 150 192 192 240 305 365 420 480 525 600 22 42 65 80 115 150 192 240 305 365 420 480 525 600

65 110
200
290
290
5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150 5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150
7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200
100 100 100 100 150 150 150 250 250 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 1200 150 150 225 225 400 400 400 600 800 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
12 (304.8) 18 (457.2)
27 28 29
36 (914.4)
54 (1371.6)
30
72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 36 (914.4)
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

65 110 200
290 290
54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
Severe duty ampere rating. See rating chart below. Consult factory for width of unit. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.9 mm) wide (rear is unusable).



Starter Size 1,2,3 3,4 5 5,6 6 7 1,2,3 3,4 5 5,6 6 7
Option Unit Size 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Structure Width 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 32 (812.8) 48 (1219.2) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 24 (609.6) 32 (812.8) 48 (1219.2)
Option ts in standard unit space. Option adds 6 inches (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
Table 30.1-15. Severe Duty Ratings

Option ts in standard unit space. Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Table 30.1-16. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches Dimensions in Inches (mm)
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V Switch Rating Freedom Unit Size Inches (mm)
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1242
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Advantage Unit Size X Space 1X 2X 3X 2X 3X 4X 6X 10X 11X 12X 4X 4X 5X 9X 12X 12X 4X 4X 6X 10X 12X 4X 5X 5X 6X 9X 12X 6X 10X 12X 12X 12X Inches (mm) X Space 1X 2X 3X 2X 3X 4X 6X 9X 10X 4X 4X 5X 8X 12X 12X 4X 4X 6X 9X 12X 4X 4X 5X 6X 8X 12X 6X 8X 12X 12X 12X
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Fusible
Type F204
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 60 (1524.0) 66 (1676.4) 72 (1828.0)
Type W204
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 60 (1524.0)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 2
7.5 10 25 40 75 150 7.5 10 25 40 75 150 7.5 10 25 25 40 75 7.5 10 25
7.5 15 30 50 100 200 7.5 15 30 50 100 200 7.5 15 30 30 50 100 7.5 15 30 30 50 100 15 30 50 100 200
10 25 50 75 150 300 10 25 50 75 150 300 10 25 50 75 150 10 25 50 50 75 150 25 50 75 150 300
10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 30 50 100 200 10 25 50 50 100 200 25 50 100 200 400
10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 50 60 100 200 10 25 30 50 30 50 60 100 200 25 50 100 200 400
30 60 100 200 400 600 30 60 100 200 400 600 30 60 60 100 100 200 400 30 60 60 100 60 100 100 200 400 60 100 200 400 600
Full Voltage Reversing Fusible
Type F214
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.0) 72 (1828.0)
Type W214
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 72 (1828.0) 72 (1828.0)
Two-Speed One Winding Fusible
Type F944
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.0)
Type W944
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.0)
Two-Speed Two Winding Fusible
Type F954
24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.0)
Type W954
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 72 (1828.0)
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
4 5 2 3 4 5 6

25 40 75 10 25 40 75 150
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Fusible
Type F604
36 (914.4) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.0) 72 (1828.0) 72 (1828.0)
Type W604
36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.0) 72 (1828.0) 72 (1828.0)
Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short circuit current. Maximum of (3) pilot devices, (2) auxiliary contacts; 100 VA CPT, standard lugs only. 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard. Certain items in unit option Groups B and C may require additional space. See Page 30.1-27. For bottom entry of motor cables. For top entry of motor cables. Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed fuses. Add 12-inch (304.8 mm) space for low speed fuses. Bottom 24-inch (609.6 mm) space in rear is unusable. Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
Note: For fusible continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.1-88 on Page 30.1-39.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1243
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.1-19
Master TOC
Table 30.1-16. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches (Continued)

NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208 V 1PW 2PW 3PW 4PW 5PW 10 20 40 50 75 100 150 15 20 25 40 50 60 100 150 250 300 15 20 25 40 50 60 100 150 250 300 240 V 10 15 25 50 75 100 150 15 25 30 50 60 75 125 150 200 250 350 15 25 30 50 60 75 125 150 200 250 350 380 V 15 25 40 75 100 150 200 250 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 480 V 15 30 40 50 75 100 150 250 350 40 60 75 125 150 250 300 400 500 700 40 60 75 125 150 250 300 400 500 700 600 V 15 40 60 75 150 300 350 40 75 150 300 350 500 700 700 40 75 50 300 350 500 700 700 60 60 100 100 200 200 400 400 600 60 100 100 200 200 400 400 600 400 600 800 1200 60 100 100 200 200 400 400 600 400 600 800 1200 Switch Rating Freedom Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 4X 4X 4X 8X 8X 9X 9X 12X Advantage Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 4X 4X 4X 8X 8X 8X 8X 12X 6X 6X 9X 10X 12X 12X
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Reduced Voltage Part Winding Fusible
Type F704
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8)
Type W704
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 72 (1828.8)
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open Transition Fusible

2YD 3YD 4YD 5YD
Type F804
36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 6X 9X 12X 12X
Type W804
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
12X
72 (1828.8)
12X
6YD
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed Transition Fusible

2YD 3YD 4YD 5YD
Type F894
48 (1219.2) 66 (1676.4) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 8X 11X 12X 12X 12X
Type W894
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 66 (1676.4) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 8X 8X 11X 12X 12X 12X
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
6YD

72 (1828.8)
12X
72 (1828.8)
12X
Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short circuit current. Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep section.
Note: For fusible continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.1-88 on Page 30.1-39.
CA08104001E

Technical Data Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter Fusible Switch Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.1-17. Standard Duty Ratings Fusible
Ampere IT. Width Maximum Horsepower (kW) Rating (mm) 208 V 240 V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 304 360 420 420 500 650 720 850 1000

Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1244
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

s Switch Rating 1.0 SF 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000 30/60 100 200 200 400 400 400 600 600 600 800 800 1200 1200 1200 1200 Unit Size Inches (mm) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 60 (1524.0)
1.0 SF 10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
380 V 1.15 SF 15 30 45 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 315 375 500
1.0 SF 18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 375 500 560
480 V 1.15 SF 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700
1.0 SF 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 600 700 800
600 V 1.15 SF 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900
65 110 200
290
290
290
10 15 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 200 200
10 20 30 40 60 75 100 100 125 200 250
10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
Standard duty ampere rating. See rating chart below. Consult factory for unit width. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).

Table 30.1-20. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
IT. Width (mm)
65 110 110 200 290 290
Fused Switch Type (Amperes) 30/60/100 100 200 400/800 600/800 800/1200
Starter Size 1,2,3 3 4 5,6 6 7
Structure Option Width Unit Size Inches (mm) Inches (mm) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 32 (812.8) 36 (914.4) 64 (1625.6)

Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1245
Home
TOC
Index

30.1-21
Master TOC
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter Fusible Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.1-21. Severe Duty Ratings Fusible
Ampere IT. Width Maximum Horsepower (kW) Rating (mm) 208 V 240 V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 22 42 42 65 80 115 115 150 192 240 305 365 420 480 480 525 600

s Switch Rating 1.0 SF 20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 30/60 30/60 100 200 200 200 400 400 400 600 600 800 800 800 1200 1200 1200 Unit Size Inches (mm) 18 (457.2)
22 23 24 25 26 27
1.0 SF 7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200
380 V 1.15 SF 7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220
1.0 SF 11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250
480 V 1.15 SF 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450
1.0 SF 15 30 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
575 V 1.15 SF 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500
65
110 200
290
290
5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150
30 (762.0) 60 (1524.0)
28 29 30
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Severe duty ampere rating. See rating chart below. Consult factory for width of unit. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).


IT. Width (mm)
65 110 110 200 290 290
Starter Size 1,2,3 3 4 5,6 6 7
Structure Option Width Unit Size Inches (mm) Inches (mm) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 32 (812.8) 36 (914.4) 64 (1625.6)

CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1246
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives

Maximum motor lead length is 500 feet (152 m). Drives are dual rated CT and VT with 150% Overload for 1 minute. Standard unit includes disconnect, 1% line reactor, 50 VA CPT, a 1.5% output reactor, and provisions for a control relay. Output reactor is not required if using an inverter duty motor. All Eatons Cutler-Hammer MVX units are plug-in for 20-inch (508 mm) wide structures. s Maximum motor lead length is 500 feet (152 m). s Firmly connect each drive chassis to an earthed ground. Grounding conduit does not provide adequate grounding. s Use separate conduit for output power conductors and digital and analog control signals. Within the MCC, care should be taken in routing power and control wiring.
s
Table 30.1-25. MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Maximum Horsepower Maximum Amperes CB Type HMCP MCCB Standard Unit Space Inches (mm) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) X Typical Option Space Inches (mm) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) X Maximum Option Space Inches (mm) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) X
208/240 Volt Application

0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0
2.5 5.0 7.0 10.0 17.0 25.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 8.2 13.0 18.0
15 15 15 30 30 50 7 7 7 15 30 30
15 15 15 20 30 50 15 15 15 15 25 35
2X 2X 2X 3X 3X 3X 2X 2X 2X 3X 3X 3X
3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X
4X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 4X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X
460 Volt Application (+/- 10%)
3% line reactors are included in standard unit.
Note: 3% line reactors should be used where Power Factor Correction Capacitors are an integral part of the MCC Line Power.
Table 30.1-26. MVX Options Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Description Space Required Inches (mm) X Manual Bypass 3% Load Reactor 5% Load Reactor Oversized CPT 100 VA 1 Ampere Power Supply 12 (304.8) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 2X 1X 1X 1X 1X
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1247
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
Table 30.1-28. Plug-in Options
Plug-in Options
30.1-23
Master TOC
SVX9000 1 30 hp at 480 V Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, an ac choke, output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. All plug-in units have a built-in Dynamic Braking Circuit, M3 frame. Standard unit drives do not include a CPT.
Note: Output reactor not included on 240 V units. Standard on 380 500 V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
22

Option Boards
I/O Expander
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute. VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute. Table 30.1-27. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CT/VT Amperes Nominal hp CT/VT or (kW) CB Type
Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus Communications PROFIBUS DP Communications LonWorks Communications Can Open (Slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) Modbus (D9 Connector)
Standard Unit Space MCCB 15 15 15 15 25 40 50 70 100 125 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 50 60 80 100 Dim. 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) (X) 3X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 7X 7X 7X 3X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 4X 6X 6X 6X
Typical Options Unit Space Dim. 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) (X) 5X 5X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X 8X 8X 8X 5X 5X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X 6X 8X 8X 8X
Max. Option Unit Space Dim. 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) (X) 6X 6X 6X 6X 7X 7X 7X 9X 9X 9X 6X 6X 6X 6X 7X 7X 7X 7X 9X 9X 9X
Plug-in Control Relays

1 Relay 2 Relays 3 Relays

HMCP 7 15 15 15 15 30 50 50 100 100 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 30 50 50 100
200 240 Volts

3.6 4.7 5.6 7 10 16 22 30 43 57 2.5 3 3.5 5 8 11 15 21 27 34 40
.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Other Options
Automatic Bypass Circuit Bypass Drive Test Switch 7 Relay 120 V Control with CPT Isolated Signal Processor 3-15 PSIG Interface Dynamic Breaking Resistors Graphics Keypad Line Fuses RFI Filter Deduct to Remove Output Filter KLC 2000 ft. (610 m) DV/DT Filter Output Contactor Dual Overloads 3 Contactor Bypass

380 500 Volts
RWT Filter
NEMA 1 NEMA 4X and Class 1, Division 2

For fusible disconnect use typical option unit.

Note: Drive units t into a standard 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide MCC structure.
Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 32 for detailed information. All options will t in typical and maximum option unit. This option will t in all units. One of these options will t in 5 30 hp CT at 480 V frame standard units, 1 30 hp CT at 480 V typical and maximum option units. All options will t in maximum option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. Not available for 240 V units. RWT is mounted at the motor. See Section 35 for Reected Wave Trap (RWT).
Note: Output reactor or DV/DT lter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT lter is used at the motor. Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard output reactor. Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT lter.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1248
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
SVX9000 30 200 hp at 480 V Non-Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. Standard units of 9X unit space must be located in the bottom of the MCC and there is no vertical bus in the lower 48 inches (1219.2 mm). There is no vertical bus for 12X units.
Note: Output reactor not included on 200 240 V units. Standard on 380 690 V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
Table 30.1-30. Non-Plug-in Options

Non Plug-in Options
Option Boards
I/O Expander Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus Communications PROFIBUS DP Communications LonWorks Communications Can Open (slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) Modbus (D9 Connector)

CT Nominal Amperes hp or CT (kW) VT Nominal Amperes hp or VT (kW) CB Type
Standard Unit Space (X) 9X 9X 9X 12X
Drive Option Space Dim. 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) (X) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X


HMCP MCCB Dim. 100 100 100 150 125 175 200 150 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
200 240 Volts

70 83 113 139 165 200 52 65 77 96 125 160 180 260

25 30 40 50 60 75 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200
70 83 113 139 165 200 264 52 65 77 96 125 160 180 250 320
25 30 40 50 60 75 100 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250
Other Options
Automatic Bypass Circuit Bypass Drive Test Switch 7 Relay 120 V Control with CPT Isolated Signal Processor 3-15 PSIG Interface Dynamic Breaking Resistors Graphics Keypad Line Fuses RFI Filter Deduct to Remove Output Filter KLC 1000 ft. (305 m) DV/DT Filter Output Contactor Dual Overloads 3 Contactor Bypass Dynamic Breaking Circuit

100 100 100 150 150 250 400 400 400

125 150 175 225 300 400 500 600 700
12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 9X 9X 9X 9X 12X 12X 12X 12X 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
380 500 Volts, 50/60 Hz
12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8)
Drives with Fusible disconnects require drive with option space. 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide, 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel. 32-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure built-in panel. 40-inch wide (1016.0 mm), 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.
RWT Filter

36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 32 for detailed information. This option will t in all units. All options will t in option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. Not available for 240 V units. RWT is mounted at the motor.
Note: Output reactor or DV/DT lter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT lter is used at the motor. Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard output reactor. Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT lter. Note: Fusible units take option unit space. Not all options will t in fusible units.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1249
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
Table 30.1-32. Multi-Structure Options
Plug-in Options
30.1-25
Master TOC
SVX9000 200 1100 hp at 480 V Multi-Structure Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, and a door-mounted keypad. Disconnect and drive unit are in separate structures, structures are mechanically interlocked. Structures have no vertical bus. These drives are bottom exit only. CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute. VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute. Table 30.1-31. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CT Nominal Amperes hp or CT (kW) VT Nominal CB Amperes hp or VT Type (kW) Standard Unit Space (X) Drive Option Space Dim. (X) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
22

Option Boards
I/O Expander
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus Communications PROFIBUS DP Communications LonWorks Communications Can Open (Slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) Modbus (D9 Connector)
HMCP MCCB Dim.


380 550 Volts

320 400 480 600 700 880 1020 1070 1200 1300

250 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
400 460 600 672 880 1020 1070 1200
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
400 600 600 1200 1200 1200 1200 1600 1600 1600
800 800 1200 1600 1600 2000 2000 2000 2500 2500
72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
Other Options
Automatic Bypass Circuit Bypass Drive Test Switch 7 Relay 120 V Control with CPT Isolated Signal Processor 3-15 PSIG Interface Dynamic Breaking Resistors Graphics Keypad Line Fuses RFI Filter Deduct to Remove Output Filter KLC 2000 ft. (610 m) DV/DT Filter Output Contactor 3 Contactor Bypass Dynamic Breaking Circuit

Drives with fusible disconnects require drive with option space. 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. 80-inch (2032.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure. 68-inch (1727.2 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 48-inch (1219.2 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. Contact factory for sizing. 100-inch (2540.0 mm) wide unit. 80-inch (2032.0 mm) drive is in (2) 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structures, disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. 116-inch (2946.4 mm) wide unit. 96-inch (2438.4 mm) drive is in (2) 48-inch (1219.2 mm) wide structures, disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
RWT Filter

Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 32 for detailed information. This option will t in all units. All options will t in Option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. DV/DT lter not available 700 hp and above. Consult factory for sizing and availability. RWT is mounted at the motor. See Section 35 for Reected Wave Trap (RWT).
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1250
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Option Groups for ac Combination Starters, ac Drives

Option Group A
Table 30.1-33. Wiring Class
Description NEMA Class IA NEMA Class IC NEMA Class IIB NEMA Class IIC NEMA Class IS (Includes 1B wiring and 2B schematics)
Table 30.1-39. Internal Circuit Breaker Options

Description Alarm Contact Auxiliary 1NO 1NC Auxiliary 2NO 2NC 120 Volts Shunt Trip 50C (Thermal Magnetic)
Table 30.1-40. Terminal Blocks

Description Side Mounted (Will accept stripped wire or ring/spade wire lug 12 AWG bare/14 AWG ring/spade) Front Rail Pressure Connector Front Rail Pull Apart Front Rail Utility/Accepts ring wire lug.
Control Terminal Blocks and Device Panels not included with NEMA 1A wiring.
Table 30.1-34. 100 kA Circuit Breaker Starter Interrupting Capacity

Starter Type Starters with HMCPs Starters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers Starters with HMCPs Starters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Voltage 480 480 600 600
Additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space required for Freedom Starters Sizes 1 4
Use Burndy YAEV10-L36 for #10 AWG compression termination.
Table 30.1-41. Control Wire Options

Description #16 AWG (standard) #14 AWG Wire Markers Spade Wire Terminals Ring Wire Terminals Wiring to Common CPT SIS Power Wire Substitution SIS Control Wire Substitution Starter Class 2 Interwiring/Per Wire
Current Limiter Attachments are used. Add 6 inches (152.4 mm) to all size 3 and 4 starters.
Table 30.1-35. Control Circuit Transformers Typical Sizing

Starter Size 1, 2 (100 VA) Includes extra 50 VA 3, 4 (150 VA) Includes extra 50 VA 5, 6 (250 VA) Includes extra 50 VA Extra 50 VA, Size 1, 2 Extra 100 VA, Size 3, 4 Extra 150 VA, Size 5, 6
Freedom Starter control terminals only available with spade wire terminals.
Refer to Table 30.1-85 for actual ratings.
Note: Price includes 1 secondary and 2 primary fuses.
Table 30.1-42. Miscellaneous Options

Description Mini Ammeter and CT Mini Voltmeter Mini Elapsed Time Meter Panel Elapsed Time Meter Operations Counter Wiring Diagram on Door Coil Surge Suppressor CT for Remote Metering (Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space) Heater Packs Installed Device Labels Blank Device Panels

Table 30.1-36. Control Circuit Fusing

Description Control Fuse and Auxiliary Switch Control Fuse Blown Fuse Indicator
Note: Required in accordance with NEC for all starter units with control wiring external to the MCC. See NEC, General for exceptions.
Table 30.1-37. Motor Starter Auxiliary Contacts

Description 1NO or 1NC (Sizes 1 4) 1NO or 1NC (Sizes 5 6)
Maximum of eight on each contactor Maximum of four on each contactor
May add 6 inches (152.4 mm) to unit size. Consult factory. May add 6 inches (152.4 mm). Consult factory.
Maximum of 4 per contactor on multi-contactor starters and 6-inch (152.4 mm) units.
Table 30.1-43. Vacuum Contactors in Lieu of Air Break

Starter Type FVNR FVR, 2S2W, PW RVAT, 2S1W, YD-Open YD-Closed Available Sizes 4 6
Table 30.1-38. Interlock for Switch or Breaker Operator

Description 1NO 1NC 2NO 2NC
Table 30.1-44. Ground Fault Protection Instantaneous or Adjustable

Description Earth Leakage Breakers Sizes 1 4 Earth Leakage Breakers Size 5 D64 Relay (with zero sequence CT) All require additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space
Note: For use when control circuit is fed from an external source.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1251
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data Option Group C
Devices may require extra unit space. Table 30.1-51. Monitoring Relays
Type of Relay D60LA Current Sensing Voltage Transducer ac Current Sensors with CTs ac Current Transducer, 4 20 mA, Self-powered with CTs Price Includes 1 PT 0 5 Thru 0 100 A 0 50 Thru 0 300 A 0 300 Thru 0 600 A All Ratings
30.1-27
Master TOC
Table 30.1-45. Power Fuses R, J Type

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
22 23
Additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space required
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.1-46. Power Factor Capacitor Options

Description Blown Power Fuse Indicator (Set of 3-1 Per Phase)
Table 30.1-47. Current Limiter Attachment for HMCP

Description Size 1-2 Size 3 Size 4 Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space
Phase Monitoring Relay 3-Phase Watt Transducer, 4 20 mA, Self-powered CTs

Loop powered devices requires 24 Vdc power source which is typically provided in the PLC. Does not require separate 24 Vdc power source. Suitable for powering analog meters.
Option Group B
Devices may require extra unit space. Table 30.1-48. Timing Relays
Type of Relay Solid-State Timer Pneumatic AGASTAT 24 Hour Motor Timer 7 Day Timer Repeat Cycle Timer Mounting Panel Panel On or Off Delay Panel Panel Door or Panel
Table 30.1-52. Extra Bi-Metallic Overload Relay Type C306

Description Size 1 32 Amperes Overload Relay Size 2 75 Amperes Overload Relay Size 3 100 Amperes Overload Relay Size 4 144 Amperes Overload Relay
Option Group D
Devices may require extra unit space. Table 30.1-53. Solid-State Overload Relays
Description CEP7 Solid-State Overload CEP7B Advanced Solid-State Overload MP-3000 Motor Protector MP-3000 RTD Module IQ 500 Relay IQ 500M Load Protection

Table 30.1-49. Control Relays

Number of Poles 2-Pole 4-Pole 2-Pole 4-Pole 6-Pole 8-Pole 10-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 6-Pole 8-Pole
Type General Purpose Type D7 Socket Relay N300 Fixed Contacts Type AR Machine Tool Relays N600 Convertible Contacts
Type M D26 Relays N600 Convertible Contacts
Requires thermal-magnetic disconnect. Includes LAM, JAM, ULM functions with 2 dry contacts. Requires a 120 V source. Size 4 starters require an additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) (1X) space when used with CEP7 Solid-State Overload.
The 6- and 8-pole units can be provided with 4 additional non-convertible NO contacts.
Table 30.1-50. Alternators

Description 2-Circuit Alternator 3-Circuit Alternator Panel (Additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space required on size 1s and size 2s)
CA08104001E

Technical Data Option Group E
Table 30.1-54. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
Device Device Type 10250T Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb

Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1252
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Option Group F
Options for 6-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Units

Control terminal blocks are 300 volt rated and are limited to 12 points maximum. s Standard VA control transformer only.
s

Device Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb
Device Type E22
E30
On 6-inch (152.4 mm) starter units, pilot devices are limited to (3) E22 devices.
Maximum 2 devices per starter in dual units. Maximum of 6 devices without increasing compartment space.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1253
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.1-29
Master TOC
Eatons Cutler-Hammer dc Motor Control Center

UL listed dc MCCs use combination circuit breaker dc starters suitable for motor starting duty only. Using Cutler-Hammer Type ME dc denite purpose contactors, all dc starters are suitable for up to 250 Vdc and have a 22 kA withstand rating. Class 135 starting resistors for reduced voltage starters are sized for 200% starting current. Typical applications include emergency lube oil pumps, emergency seal oil pumps and emergency turning gear motors. Table 30.1-56. Cutler-Hammer dc Motor Control Center HCMP or Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker
dc Starters HMCP or Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker Full Voltage Non-Reversing Size 1 Full Voltage Reversing Size 1 Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 2 Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 3 Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 4

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
hp Interrupting 125 Vdc Capacity 3 22 kAIC 5 10 20
MCCB 250 Vdc 5 10 20 40 250 150
Unit X Size Space Inches (mm) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 5X 6X 5X
42 (1066.8) 7X 48 (1219.2) 8X
Not available in NEMA 3R enclosures. 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure required. Rear is unusable.
Table 30.1-57. Cutler-Hammer dc Motor Control Center Model K Fused Switch (RK5 Fuses not Included)
dc Starters Model K Fused Switch (RK5 Fuses not Included) Full Voltage Non-Reversing Size 1 Full Voltage Reversing Size 1 Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 2 Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 3 Reduced Voltage Non-Reversing Size 4

hp 125 Vdc 3 5 10 20 250 Vdc 5 10 20 40
Switch X Unit Size Size Space (Amperes) Inches (mm) 30 60 100 200 36 (914.4) 42 (1066.8) 48 (1219.2) 6X 7X 8X
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
60 (1524.0) 10X 72 (1828.8) 12X
Fused switch units are not UL listed. Not available in NEMA 3R enclosures. 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure required. Rear is unusable.
Table 30.1-58. Options

400% Starting Torque Resistors Ammeter and dc Shunt. Starter Mounted Ammeter and dc Shunt. Incoming Line Negative Side Line Contactor Negative Overload Relay Shunt Field Discharge Resistor
Add 2X space.
Table 30.1-59. Standards

200% Starting Torque Resistors MME dc Contactors Positive Side Contactor and Overload Relay Only Bus Systems for dc Motor Control Centers are 2-phase. The B-phase Bus Bar is Removed Reduced Voltage Starters include NEMA Class 135 Edgewound Power Resistors MCC Plug-in Combination dc Starters UL 845 Listed
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1254
Master TOC
22 23 24 25
Table 30.1-60. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers Dimensions in Inches (mm) Frames reect standard circuit breakers. Unit spacings shown include sufcient space to terminate cables on any standard breaker lug. If cable sizes exceed those listed, add 12-inch (304.8 mm) space for lug adapters.
Frame Size (Amperes) 150 225 250 Circuit Breaker Frame HFD FDC HFD FDC HJD JDC HKD KDC CHKD CKDC 600 HLD LDC CHLD CLDC 800 HMDL CHMDL NDC CHND CNDC 1200 HND NDC CHND CNDC 2000 RD RDC CRD CRDC RD RDC Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) 240 V 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 480 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 575 V 25 35 35 35 35 35 25 50 25 50 35 50 35 50 35 35 50 35 50 35 50 35 50 50 65 50 65 50 65 Main Unit Size Inches (mm) 18 (457.2) T, B 18 (457.2) T, B 30 (762.0) T, B 30 (762.0) T, B 30 (762.0) T, B 24 (609.6) B 30 (762.0) T 24 (609.6) B 30 (762.0) T 30 (762.0) T, B 48 (1219.2) T, B 42 (1066.8) T, B 72 (1828.8) T, B 42 (1066.8) T, B 72 (1828.8) T, B 72 (1828.8) X Space 3X 3X 5X 5X 5X 4X 5X 4X 5X 5X 8X 7X 12X 7X 12X 12X Feeder Unit Size Inches (mm) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 42 (1066.8) 72 (1828.8) 42 (1066.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) X Space 2X 3X 3X 4X 5X 5X 4X 5X 8X 7X 12X 7X 12X 12X Maximum Cable Size See circuit breaker terminal data for variations. 4/0 (1 per Phase) 4/0 (1 per Phase) 350 kcmil (1 per Phase) 250 kcmil (2 per Phase) or 500 kcmil (1 per Phase) 250 kcmil (2 per Phase) or 500 kcmil (1 per Phase) 500 kcmil (2 per Phase) 500 kcmil (2 per Phase) 750 kcmil (3 per Phase) 750 kcmil (3 per Phase) 750 kcmil (3 per Phase) 750 kcmil (3 per Phase) 750 kcmil (3 per Phase) 750 kcmil (3 per Phase) 750 kcmil (6 per Phase)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
400
2500

72 (1828.8)
12X
72 (1828.8)
12X
750 kcmil (6 per Phase)
For 100% rated application, please refer to Page 21.4-61 Application Information 100% Rated Circuit Breakers. T = top, B = bottom. 100% Rated when 90 cable is applied at 75C ampacity for 100% rating. RMS 310 LS is required and included in the price. Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) for top entry of incoming cables. Install at top or cable top entry or at bottom for bottom cable entry. NEMA 1 gasketed only. Digitrip RMS 310 LS is standard and included in the pricing. The main breaker requires the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable. 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide. Install at top of vertical section for top entry cable and at bottom for bottom entry.
Table 30.1-61. Dual Feeder Units Molded Case Circuit Breakers Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Maximum Amperes 50/50 50/100 100/100 100/100 150/150 Circuit Breaker Frame HFD FDC HFD FDC HFD FDC HFD FDC HFD FDC Interrupting Ratings (kAIC) 240 V 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 480 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 600 V 25 35 25 35 25 35 25 35 25 35 Enclosure Width Inches (mm) Standard 20 (508.0) Main Unit Size Feeder Unit Size Maximum Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space Cable Size 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X See above breaker frame information
N/A
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1255
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
Table 30.1-65. Main-Tie-Main Auto-Throw Over Options
Enclosure Depth 36 (914.4) Option AT200 Description
30.1-31
Master TOC
Table 30.1-62. Main Circuit Breakers Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers Manually or Electrically Operated Fixed Mounted Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size Amperes 800 1600 2000 3200 Circuit Breaker Type MDS-608 MDS-C08 MDS-616 MDS-C16 MDS-620 MDS-C20 MDS-632 MDS-C32 Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Unit Size 240 V 480 V 575 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 42 (1066.8) Enclosure Width
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6)
Standard PLC-based control scheme. No operator interface (PanelMate) provided. Sequence of operations and external controls are pre-dened and not subject to customer modications. Type of voltage sensing device must be chosen. If closed-transition operation is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used. Same as AT200, except includes operator interface (PanelMate). Same as AT200, except customer modications are acceptable. This is the proper choice for PLC-based systems with special sequences, more than main-tie-main congurations, and/or where special PanelMate page layouts are required. Standard IQ Transfer-based control scheme for main-main congurations. Either or both sources may be generators. Includes manual-auto operation, and generator control switch. If closed-transition operation is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
AT300 AT300X
Note: A 4-inch (101.6 mm) ller section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
Table 30.1-63. Main Circuit Breakers Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated Drawout Mounted Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size (Amperes) 800 1600 2000 3200

Circuit Breaker Type MDS-608 MDS-C08 MDS-616 MDS-C16 MDS-620 MDS-C20 MDS-632 MDS-C32
240 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Unit Size 480 V 575 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100
Enclosure Width
Enclosure Depth AT300IQ 42 (1066.8)
72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6)
Panelmate page layouts are pre-dened, and not subject to customer modications.
A 4-inch (101.6 mm) ller section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening. Structure is rear aligned.
Table 30.1-64. Digitrip Units

Type RMS 310 1150 Refer to Page 21.4-10 for more details. Unit Space Inches (mm) 72 (1828.8) or 12X
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Options
Tie Breaker Electrically Operated
Accessories
UV Release-Instantaneous Shunt Trip (standard on electrically operated breakers) Key Interlock on breaker Auxiliary Switch (3A/3B) Cell Position Switch Operations Counter Auxiliary Power Module (to test Digitrip) Portable Lift Truck Manual Close Pushbutton Cover
Tie breaker adds an additional 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide bus transition section. Also (2) 4-inch (101.6 mm) ller sections will be added to the MCC if the tie breaker is located in the center of the MCC lineup. If the tie breaker is located between the two main structures the (2) 4-inch (101.6 mm) llers are not needed.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Table 30.1-66. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3-Pole 250 V or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
Switch Rating Amperes 30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual 60/60 Dual 100 200 400 600 800 1200

Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1256
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Fuse Clip Size Amperes 30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual 60/60 Dual 100 200 400 600 800 1200
Unit Space Incoming Line Inches (mm) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) Feeder X Space Inches (mm) X Space 3X 3X 3X 5X 8X 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 42 (1066.8) 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 3X 5X 7X
Table 30.1-69. Lighting Panelboard Circuit Breakers Eatons Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers can be either plug-in or bolt-on, 1-, 2- or 3-pole through 240 V. 600 V maximum 1-, 2- or 3-pole circuit breakers are bolt-on.
Poles Maximum Voltage 240 240 600 600 Plug-in Bolt-on Ampere Interrupting Capacity 10,000 22,000 14,000 65,000
1/2/3 1/2/3 1/2/3 1/2/3
HQP QPHW
BAB QBHW EHD HFD
Table 30.1-70. Automatic Transfer Switches Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere Switch Rating Type 100 150 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000 1000 1200 1600 2000 100 150 260 400 600 800 1000 1200
54 (1371.8) 9X 48 (1219.2) 8X 60 (1524.0) 10X
48 (1219.2) 8X 48 (1219.2) 8X 60 (1524.0) 10X
Interrupting Unit Rating (kA) Width 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 65 65 65 35 35 50 50 100 24 (609.6)
Unit Space 36 (914.4) or 6X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 72 (1828.8) or 12X 72 (1828.8) or 12X
Cutler-Hammer MTVX, NTVS Cutler-Hammer MTVX, NTVS Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVISP Cutler-Hammer ATVISP Cutler-Hammer ATVISP Cutler-Hammer ATVISP ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000
20 (508.0)
Suitable for 100,000 A interrupting if Class RK fuses are used. Type of SW K-SW 30 800 amperes. For bottom cable entry, add 6 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space. For bottom entry, add 12 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space. For top entry, add 6 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space. High magnetic molded case switch.
Table 30.1-67. Lighting Panelboards 120/240 V or 120/208 V Lighting Panelboards Type PL1A Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire; 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire.
Number of Circuits Chassis Rating (Amperes) Unit Space Inches (mm) 3-Phase 4-Wire 24 (609.6) or 4X 30 (762.0) or 5X 36 (914.4) or 6X
44 (1117.6) 72 (1828.8) or 12X
20 (508.0)
1-Phase 3-Phase 1-Phase 3-Wire 4-Wire 3-Wire 18 30 42 225 225 225 100 100 225 24 (609.6) or 4X 30 (762.0) or 5X 36 (914.4) or 6X
72 (1828.8) or 12X
28 (711.2)
36 (914.4)
40 (1016.0)
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Bolt-on 1-, 2-, 3-pole breakers only.
Table 30.1-68. 277/480 V or 480/600 V Lighting Panelboards Type PRL3A Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 480 or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire or 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire. Mounted in bottom portion of structure.
Number of Circuits Chassis Rating (Amperes) 100 250 100 250 100 250 100 250 400/600 400/600 400/600 400/600 Unit Space Inches (mm) 3-Phase 3-Wire 36 (914.4) or 6X 36 (914.4) or 6X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 36 (914.4) or 6X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 3-Phase 4-Wire 36 (914.4) or 6X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 72 (1828.8) or 12X
14 18 24 26 32 36 42 42 12 14 30 42
ATVI designs include IQ Transfer door mounted microprocessor-based monitoring device for use in open transition transfer switches where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situations is essential. The IQ Transfer is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be used with Cutler-Hammer transfer switches. This device provides the operator with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the power source currently in use. The IQ Transfer continuously monitors either single-phase or 3-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the Load. Depending on the application, the user can customize the IQ Transfer to meet specic application need. Manually operated switch: MTVX = Single handle manual operation. NTVS = Electrically operated non-automatic. Requires 42-inch (1066.8 mm) deep structure.
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Either plug-in or bolt-on 1-, 2-, 3-pole breakers only.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1257
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.1-33
Master TOC
Table 30.1-71. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers s Transformer 1.0 2.0 kVA will include a circuit breaker and fuses in a standard 2X unit. s Transformers 3.0 kVA and above have taps and electrostatic shields as standard. s Transformers 3.0 kVA and above will include the primary and secondary circuit breakers housed behind a single door.
kVA Rating Unit Space Primary Breaker (included in space factor) 230 V 480 V 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 30 40 60 70 80 125 15 25 40 50 70 Secondary Breaker (included in space factor)
Table 30.1-73. Current Limiting Reactors Dimensions in Inches (mm) Structures contain three single-phase 60 Hz reactors which limit available short circuit current from 100,000 rms amperes to 14,000 rms amperes. Reactors available with ohmic values of .01, .015, .02 and .025.
Amperes Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space 600 800 1000 1200 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 12X 12X 12X 12X 21 D x 20 W (533.4 D x 508.0 W) 21 D x 20 W (533.4 D x 508.0 W) 26 D x 28 W (660.4 D x 711.2 W) 26 D x 28 W (660.4 D x 711.2 W) Mounting
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Single-Phase
.5 .75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 45 9 15 25 30 45
2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 4X 4X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 6X 7X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 25 40 50 60 70 100 15 20 40 40 60
20 30 40 60 90 125 150 175 250 40 60 90 125 175
Table 30.1-74. TVSS (Clipper Power System) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect Includes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C contact, alarm enable and disable, and circuit breaker disconnect.
Description Unit Space Inches X Space (mm) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X
Surge Current Per Phase

100 kA 120 kA 160 kA 200 kA 250 kA 300 kA 400 kA 500 kA
CPS-100 CPS-120 (Recommended Branch Unit) CPS-160 CPS-200 CPS-250 (Recommended Service Entrance) CPS-300 CPS-400 CPS-500
Three-Phase
Also available in 12-inch (304.8 mm) unit (2X) without circuit breaker disconnect.
Note: Specify 3-phase Delta or 3-phase Wye.
Transformers feeding an MCC mounted panelboard require a secondary breaker or main breaker in panelboard.
Table 30.1-72. Power Factor Correction Capacitors PF capacitors are electrolytic type and are optionally available with external line fuses and blown fuse indicators. Capacitors sizes must be specied by the customer. Caution: Capacitors on the main bus of the MCC may affect solid-state equipment. Please consult factory.
kvar Rating 208 V Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space 240 V Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space 600 V Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space
Table 30.1-75. DeviceNet Communications DeviceNet-enabled components in MCCs eliminate up to 90% of the control wiring versus traditional hardwired designs. 24 Vdc DeviceNet is prewired throughout the MCC. Trunk cable is provided in the horizontal wireway. Drop cable is provided for vertical wireways and units.
Part Number Description Space Requirements No Additional Space No Additional Space No Additional Space
WPONIDNA DeviceNet interface for Advantage Starter DN65 MVXDN OPTC7 DeviceNet interface for Freedom Starter MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives DeviceNet Interface
2 3 4 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 25 30 40 50 60 75 90 100 120
12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X 36 (914.4) 6X 36 (914.4) 6X
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives DeviceNet Interface DN50, DN65 Discrete DeviceNet Interface for IT. Solid-State Starters PS1 Single 5 ampere Power Supply PS2 PanelMate 1700 DN50
2X 2X 12-inch (304.8 mm)/ 2X 12-inch (304.8 mm)/ 2X Minimum
Dual 5 ampere Power Supply Operator interface for DeviceNet System DeviceNet I/O module
IT. starters up to 66 amperes require additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) when selecting DN50, DN65 DeviceNet interfaces.
CA08104001E

Technical Data Earth Leakage Breakers
Earth Leakage Breakers offer Class 1 ground fault protection down to the 30 mA level. Ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from .03 to 30 A in eight steps. s Ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds in six steps.
s
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1258
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.1-78. Incoming Line Metering and Bus Protection

Type Description Unit Space Inches (mm) 12 (304.8) or 2X
Switchboard Ammeter Meters Ammeter with Switch 1% Accuracy Voltmeter Voltmeter with Switch AM/VM AM/VM with Switches Instrument 600/800 Ampere CT Transformers 1000 Ampere CT 2000 Ampere CT 2500 Ampere CT 480/120 PT Signal Transducers Current (Add CT) 1-Phase Voltage (Add PT) Watt (Add CT and PT) 1-Phase
Standard Features
Built-in push-to-trip for functional testing. s Tripped window indicates red for ground fault trip. s Alarm contact for remote indication of trip.
s
Consult Cutler-Hammer
Table 30.1-76. Earth Leakage Breakers

Frame F J K
6 (152.4) or 1X 6 (152.4) or 1X
HMCP or Thermal-Magnetic Yes Yes Yes
Additional Space Required 1X 1X 1X
Voltage Protection
TVSS (See Table 30.1-74) Ground Detection Lights 3-Phase Underground Systems System Voltage Monitor Lightning Arrester and Surge Capacitor 18 (457.2) or 3X 6 (152.4) or 1X 72 (1828.8) or 12X
Six-inch (152.4 mm) not required for NEMA size 6 starters.
Table 30.1-77. Electronic Metering Specications

Description Volts Current Power Power Factor Frequency THD Demand Values Trend Analysis Programmable Output Relays Programmable Analog Outputs Contact Inputs Analog Inputs Display Type IQ 320 L-L, L-N A, B, C Watt, var, VA Apparent, Displacement Hertz All
IQ DP-4130 L-L, L-N A, B, C Watt, var, VA Apparent, Displacement Hertz Amperes, Volts All (3) 10A Form C (1) kW Demand 7 Segment LED Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
IQ Analyzer 6400 and 6600 L-L, L-N A, B, C, N, G Watt, var, VA Apparent, Displacement Hertz Amperes, Volts All Time, Date (4) 10A Form C (3) 0-10/4-20 mA (3) + 30 Vdc Differential (1) 0-20/4-20 mA Graphic LCD with LED Backlight Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Ground Fault Sensing C-HRG Safe Ground High Resistance Ground System
Current Voltage

Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure without a vertical wireway.
Two electronic meters will t in a single 12-inch (304.8 mm) (2X) unit. 3-phase/3-wire systems require 2 CTs. 3-phase/4-wire systems require 3 CTs. Ammeters require 2 CTs for 3-phase/3-wire systems, and 3 CTs for 3-phase/4-wire systems. Voltmeters require 2 PTs for 3-phase/3-wire systems, and 3-PTs for 3-phase/4-wire systems. Without disconnect 12 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X.
Harmonic Correction
Table 30.1-79. Clean Control Center The Eatons Cutler-Hammer Clean Control Center is an integrated power correction system that provides harmonic correction directly on the MCC Horizontal Bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and dynamically injects into the Horizontal Bus a synthesized waveform which cancels harmonic content from non-linear loads such as ac drives. The result is a clean waveform. Clean Control Centers are UL 845 listed.
Harmonic Current (Amperes) Input Disconnect Voltage Type Standard Unit Space Inches (mm) Standard Unit Space (X)
Reverse Mode LCD with LED Backlight
Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

Requires 12-inch (1X) unit space. For Power Xpert meter, See Section 3. At computer only. Up to 24 data values may be used for Trend Analysis with Time, Date Stamp. Communications to Modbus, Ethernet available via optional Communication Modules.
50 A Active Up to Harmonic Filter 480 V Up to 100 A Active Harmonic Filter 480 V
Molded 72 H x 20 W 12X Case Switch (1828.8 H x 508.0 W) Molded 72 H x 20 W 12X Case Switch (1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
Clean Control Center model includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCE structure, current transformers and door-mounted digital interface panel. Multiple units can be applied in parallel for additional harmonic correction.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1259
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.1-35
Master TOC
Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic Control Typical Layout

Source Side Harmonics Attenuated Load Side Harmonics Present
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Main Breaker Panelboard Harmonic Correction Unit 100 A SVX9000 ac Drive (30 hp) SVX9000 ac Drive (150 hp) SVX9000 ac Drive (250 hp) Starter
30 31 32 33
TVSS Protection Module
Distribution Transformer
34 35
Starter SVX9000 ac Drive (30 hp)
36 37 38
Starter
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
28.00 (711.2)
20.00 (508.0)
39 40 41 42 43
Figure 30.1-2. Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic Control Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: As seen by the upstream electrical system compliance to the most stringent standards of IEEE 519 is assured.
The layout above is a typical arrangement for Eatons CutlerHammer Clean Control Center including harmonic correction units for non-linear loads such as ac Variable Frequency Drives. The horizontal bus of the Clean Control Center is virtually free of harmonic current content at the point where the Harmonic Correction Unit connects to the bus. From this point to the connection at the utility bus, the Clean Control Center complies with the most stringent requirements of IEEE 519 and provides
a clean waveform to the upstream distribution system. Harmonic Correction may be applied to loads fed directly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted ac drives) or loads fed indirectly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted circuit breakers feeding remote drives). Multiple correction units may be used to achieve the level of harmonic correction as required by the amount of non-linear loads within the MCC lineup.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1260
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Standard Structures and Structure Options

Eatons Cutler-Hammer standard Freedom or Advantage 2100 Series MCC structure is NEMA 1, gasketed, 90-inch (2286.0 mm) high, 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide with a depth as shown in Figure 30.1-3. Each standard structure has a 9-inch (228.6 mm) high horizontal wireway at the top and at the bottom and a 4-inch (101.6 mm) wide full height vertical wireway at the right.
Description
All wireway doors are hinged and secured with 1/4-turn latches. The standard busing is 600 A, UL rated, copper horizontal bus and 300 A, UL rated, copper vertical bus braced for 65,000 symmetrical amperes. Many other bus sizes and types are available. Also included as standard is a vertical bus isolation barrier.
16 (406.4)
90 (22 286.0)
Table 30.1-80. Standard Structures and Structure Options Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Standard Structures
16 (406.4) deep structure 21 (533.4) deep structure Front mounting only Front and rear mounting 4 (101.6) of additional structure width, 32 (812.8) maximum 8 (203.2) vertical wireway in lieu of standard 4-inch (101.6) Structure 1 Structure 2 Structure 3
21 (533.4)
20 (508.0)
Structure 1 72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space Front Mounted Only
Special Structures
Single corner section for L conguration of MCC Transition section Series 2100 to Type W 10 (254.0) wide front aligned Plug-in blank relay mounting space, per 6-inch Fixed-mounted relay back pan, full depth of structure 20 (508.0) structure with wireway, 13 (330.2) with usable panel 24 (609.6) structure with wireway, 17 (431.8) with usable panel 28 (711.2) structure with wireway, 21 (533.4) with usable panel 20 (508.0) structure without wireway, 17 (431.8) with usable panel 24 (609.6) structure without wireway, 21 (533.4) with usable panel 28 (711.2) structure without wireway, 25 (635.0) with usable panel 32 (812.8) with double door 36 (914.4) with double door 40 (1016.0) with double door Programmable controller mounting structure (per complete structure with full xed mounting back pan) 20 (508.0) structure with wireway 24 (609.6) structure with wireway 28 (711.2) structure with wireway 20 (508.0) structure without wireway 24 (609.6) structure without wireway 28 (711.2) structure without wireway Plexiglass see-through door insert for PLC structure 19 (482.6) instrumentation mounting racks installed in PLC structure
Any 6 (152.4) height
20 (508.0)
Structure 2 72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space Front Mounted Only Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section 6 (152.4) increments Consult Eaton
21 (533.4)
Top Horizontal Wireway Vertical Wireway
Table 30.1-81. Structure Modications Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Channel oor sills: 11-gauge, 1 x 3 (25.4 x 76.2) NEMA 1 gasket NEMA 12 dust-proof, includes bottom plate Bottom plate for NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure 150-watt space heater, per structure Thermostat for space heater control Pullbox kit for cable and wiring to be eld mounted on top structure 12 (304.8) high 18 (457.2) high 24 (609.6) high Rear hinged structure door, 72 (1828.8) high NEMA 2 drip shield on top of MCC NEMA 3R non-walk-in Front-mounted Back-to-back NEMA 3R walk-in aisle-front mounted NEMA 3R walk-in tunnel type NEMA 4X consult factory Special reduced height structures Seismic certication (earthquake qualication) UL handle extension
Vertical Compartment Bottom Horizontal Wireway 20 (508.0)
Structure 3 72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space Front 66-inch (1676.4 mm) Space Rear Back-to-Back
Figure 30.1-3. Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
The standard Freedom Series 2100 and Advantage structure is designed to comply with the UL 2-meter requirement. Disconnect operating handle is not more than 2 meters [78 inches (1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the MCC. Motor Control Centers elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. UL handle extension optionally available when required.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1261
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.1-37
Master TOC
Table 30.1-82. Bus Modications Dimensions in Inches (mm) Eatons Cutler-Hammer Freedom and Advantage 2100 Series MCCs bear the UL label. Service entrance labeling is available.
Description Main Bus, Per Vertical Structure Copper Horizontal Bus Ratings Tin-Plated Cu Tin-Plated (Standard) 21 (533.4) Deep 21 (533.4) Deep 21 (533.4) Deep 21 (533.4) Deep Optional Optional Standard Cu Only Standard Cu Only Cu Only Optional Standard Optional Standard Optional Freedom Standard Cu Standard Cu Cu Cu
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
50C
65C
600 A Size .25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) Bars/Phase 1 .25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) Bars/Phase 1 800 A Size .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 1 .25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) Bars/Phase 1 .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 1 1200 A Size .25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) Bars/Phase 2 1600 A Size .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 4 .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 2 2000 A Size .25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) Bars/Phase 6 .25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) Bars/Phase 4 2500 A Size .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 8 .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 6 3200 A Size N/A .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 8 Silver-Plated Bus Main Horizontal Bus Insulated main horizontal bus, per vertical structure (taping) Vertical bus, per vertical structure: 300 A copper (tin-plated) Increased bus capacity: Rated at 600 A (Front mounted only) Rated at 600 A (Back-to-back) copper Rated at 800 A (Back-to-back and front) Rated at 1200 A Increased mechanical bus bracing, per vertical structure: 42,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current 65,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current 100,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current Vertical Bus isolation barrier, per vertical structure Labyrinth design insulation-isolation vertical bus barrier Ground bus, 300 A standard, per vertical structure Increased capacity ground bus only, 600 A, 1/4- x 2-inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm), per vertical structure Plug-in Grounding System, includes 300 A vertical ground bus and unit grounding clips, per vertical structure Neutral bus, ungrounded for 3-phase, 4-wire power, per vertical structure Splice plates

Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Not available in back-to-back structure. Contact Eaton for 3200 ampere dimensions. Vertical bus and unit stabs are tin-plated copper only. Neutral is half-rating of horizontal bus.
Table 30.1-83. Main Lugs Only Mechanical Lug Compartment (3-Phase, 3- or 4-wire) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Provisions for terminating incoming line cables directly onto the MCC bus system. Up to 1200 A, all lug landings are bolted to a fully rated vertical bus in that section. MLO sections must be put at the top for top entry cables and at the bottom for bottom entry cables. For smaller cable sizes, cable lugs may also be extended into an optional top hat as shown in this table.
Maximum Cable Size (kcmil) 350 Bus Rating (Amperes) 600 Maximum Cables per Phase 2 4 Cable Entry (Top or Bottom) Top Bottom 18-inch (457.2 mm) Top Hat 18-inch (457.2 mm) Top Hat Lug Type Screw Crimp Screw Screw Crimp Either Unit Space 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) X Space
Bus Duct Entry Sandwich Type to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect Pull Box
Pull box and pre-fabricated bus connectors are supplied to match the sandwich type bus duct end ange. Bus duct is assumed to enter the top. Bus duct type and orientation to the MCC must be provided. Table 30.1-84. Bus Duct Entry to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect Pull Box Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Horizontal Bus Rating (Amperes) 600 1600 2000 2500
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Enclosure Width
2X 3X 3X 4X 6X
Pull Box Height 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6)
Contact Eaton for 3200 ampere dimensions.
600
800
2 4
Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Either
18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4)
3X 4X 4X 6X
Note: Consult factory for non-segregated bus requirements.
20 (508.0)
750
1000
2 4 2 8
1000 1000
1200 2500 3200
Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp
24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
4X 6X 12X 12X 5X 6X 12X 12X 12X 12X
Requires 6-inch (152.4 mm) = (1X) unit space. Lug landings require the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Table 30.1-85. Typical Heat Loss Data
Description Vertical Sections Horizontal Bus and Ampacity Current (A) 600 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3200 Loss (W) 200 300 500 700 1000 1400 2050 500 40 60 100 130 230 400
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1262
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.1-86. Control Power Transformer Data All Control Power transformers are encapsulated and will deliver rated secondary voltage at full load. Two primary and one secondary fuses are furnished as standard.
NEMA Size Starter Size 1 Size 1 Size 2 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6

Starter Type
Freedom Standard VA Rating 100 100 100 N/A 150 200 200 150 100 150 200 250 200 100 100 200 350 350 200 100 100 150 200 200 200 150 150 200 350 350 200 200 350 350 200 200 Maximum VA Rating 150 100 150 N/A 250 250 350 250 150 250 250 350 350 200 200 250 500 500 350 150 150 250 250 250 350 150 150 250 500 500 350 200 200 500 500 350
Advantage Standard VA Rating 100 100 100 100 150 150 300 300 150 150 150 500 500 200 200 200 200 500 500 100 100 150 150 300 300 200 200 200 200 200 500 200 200 200 500 500 Maximum VA Rating 150 100 150 100 250 250 350 350 250 250 250 500 500 250 250 250 250 500 500 250 250 250 250 350 350 250 250 250 250 250 500 250 250 250 500 500
Space Heaters (Each) FVNR Size 1 FVNR Size 2 FVNR Size 3 FVNR Size 4 FVNR Size 5 FNVR Size6
Full Voltage Non-Reversing and Reversing
Autotransformer
Table 30.1-86. Typical Weights in lbs. (kg)

16-Inch (406.4 mm) Deep x 20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Structure 21-Inch (533.4 mm) Deep x 20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Structure 200 (91) 260 (118)
Two-Speed One Winding
Adder for Horizontal Bus

800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A 10 (5) 15 (7) 18 (8) 24 (11) 30 (14) 38 (17) 49 (22)
Two-Speed Two Winding
Adder for Vertical Bus

600 A 800 A 1200 A 30 (14) 40 (18) 60 (27)
Part Winding
Adder for Units Freedom Inches (mm)

12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4)
25 (11.4) 40 (18) 63 (29) 77 (35) 100 (45)
Wye Delta (Open or Closed Transition)
Weight for NEMA 1 structure with 600 ampere horizontal and 300 ampere vertical bus.
Maximum size without increasing starter space. 6-inch (152.4 mm) unit.
Table 30.1-87. Freedom and Advantage MCC Ratings and Highlights

Feature Vertical Bus Barrier Communications from Starter Units Bus Bracing Control Wire Horizontal Bus Material Pilot Devices 6-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Compartment FVNR Sizes 3 and 4 FVNR Size 6
Freedom Flat Glastic, Labyrinth Available IQ 500 via PowerNet, DN65 via DeviceNet IQ MP-3000 via PowerNet 65 kA Standard 42 and 100 kA Available #16 Standard Copper 10250T F206 Size 1 18-inch (457.2 mm) Compartment 54-inch (1371.6 mm) Compartment
Advantage Labyrinth Advantage WPONI or CMU via PowerNet WPONIDNA via DeviceNet 65 kA Standard 100 kA Available #14 Standard Copper ACM or 10250T W206 Sizes 1 and 2 12- or 18-inch (304.8 or 457.2 mm) Compartment 36-inch (914.4 mm) Compartment
6-inch (152.4 mm) units available with #16 control wire only.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1263
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.1-39
Master TOC
Motor Protection
In line with 2005 NEC 430.6(A) circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selections are based on full load currents for induction motors running at speeds normal for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics using data taken from NEC Table 130.250 (3-phase). Actual motor nameplate ratings shall be used for selecting motor running overload protection. Motors built special for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and applications will require other considerations as dened in the application section of the NEC. These additional considerations may require the use of a higher rated HMCP, or at least one with higher magnetic pickup settings. Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based on known characteristics of Eatons Cutler-Hammer type breakers, specic units are recommended. The current ratings are no more than the maximum limits set by the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters. Motors with lower code letters will require further considerations. In general, these selections were based on: 1. Ambient Outside enclosure not more than 40C (104F). 2. Motor starting Infrequent starting, stopping or reversing. 3. Motor accelerating time 10 seconds or less. 4. Locked rotor Maximum 6 times motor FLA. Type HMCP motor circuit protector may not set at more than 1300% of the motor full-load current to comply with NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA Design B energy high-efciency motors which can be set up to 1700%.) Circuit breaker selections are based on types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types may be required to satisfy specic system application requirements. For motor full load currents of 208 and 200 volts, increase the corresponding 230-volt motor values by 10 and 15% respectively.
Table 30.1-88. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Horsepower Full Load Fuse Size NEC 430.52 Amperes Maximum (NEC) FLA Amperes Recommended Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breaker Motor Circuit Protector Type HMCP Type Amperes HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HKD HKD HLD HLD HND HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HJD HJD HKD HJD L600 HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HJD HJD HJD HKD 7 15 15 30 30 50 50 100 100 150 150 150 150 250 400 400 600 600 600 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 50 50 70 100 100 150 150 150 150 400 400 600 3 7 7 7 15 30 30 30 50 50 70 100 100 150 150 150 250 250 400 Adj. Range 21 70 45 150 45 150 90 300 90 300 150 500 150 500 300 1000 300 1000 450 1500 450 1500 750 2500 750 2500 1250 2500 2000 4000 2000 4000 1800 6000 1800 6000 1800 6000 21 70 21 70 21 70 45 150 45 150 90 300 90 300 150 500 150 500 210 700 300 1000 300 1000 450 1500 750 2500 750 2500 750 2500 2000 4000 2000 4000 1800 6000 9 30 21 70 21 70 21 70 45 150 90 300 90 300 90 300 150 500 150 500 210 500 300 1000 300 1000 750 2500 750 2500 750 2500 1250 2500 1250 2500 2000 4000
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Time Delay Non-Time Delay Amperes
230 Volts, 3-Phase

1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 10 10 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 700 1000 6 6 6 10 15 20 25 40 50 60 70 100 125 150 175 225 300 350 450 3 6 6 10 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 110 150 175 225 300 350 15 20 25 30 50 70 90 150 175 225 250 350 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1600 6 10 15 15 25 35 45 70 90 110 125 175 200 150 300 400 500 600 800 6 10 10 15 20 30 35 60 70 90 100 125 175 200 250 300 400 450 600 15 15 15 20 30 50 60 90 100 125 150 150 200 225 300 400 500 600 700 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 45 50 70 70 100 110 125 150 175 225 250 350 15 15 15 15 15 20 25 40 50 60 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 225 300
460 Volts, 3-Phase
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
575 Volts, 3-Phase
CA08104001E

Technical Data/Dimensions
Table 30.1-89. Starter Sizes Selection Guide
Squirrel-Cage 230 V, 3-Phase Motor Control Center Full Load Horsepower Starter NEMA Current Amperes Size 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300

Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1264
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
460 V, 3-Phase Wire Size at 75C Max. at 40C Amb. 14 14 14 14 14 14 12 10 10 8 6 4 3 1 1/0 3/0 4/0 300 kcmil 500 kcmil 2 4/0 2 300 kcmil
575 V, 3-Phase Wire Size at 75C Max. at 40C Amb. 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 6 4 3 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 300 kcmil 400 kcmil
Control Center Full Load Wire Size Control Center Full Load at 75C Max. Starter NEMA Current Starter NEMA Current Amperes Amperes at 40C Amb. Size Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 1.1 1.6 2.1 3.0 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 8 8 6 4 3 2 1/0 3/0 4/0 300 kcmil 500 kcmil 2 4/0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 .9 1.3 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 242 289
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
2.2 3.2 4.2 6.0 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480
Information is based on Table 430-150 of NEC (1999). Information is based on use of copper conductors Table 310-16 and Tables 1, 4 and 5, Ch. 9 of NEC. If aluminum conductors are used refer to Table 310-16 of NEC (1999).
Dimensions in Inches (mm)

12.1 12 (307.8) 10.50 (266.7) A Horizontal Bus Location Vertical Bus Location 3.12 (79.2) 2.25 (57.2) Front Horizontal Wireway 7.16 (181.9) Deep Removable Bus Barrier Flat Rear Cover Supplied on Front Mounted Only Structure Minimum Rated V Vertical Bus Supplied as Standard in Front Mounted Only Structure
Front Horizontal Wireway 7.16 (181.9) Deep Location of Ground Bus 12 12 12.12 (307.8) 10.50 (266.7) A Horizontal Bus Location Vertical Bus Location Removable Bus Barrier 3.12 (79 9.2) 4.62 (11 17.3) 15.00 (381.0) 4.62 (117. (11 3) Rear Horizontal Wireway 4.97 (126.2) Deep
Location of Ground Bus
4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (117.3)

2.25 (57.2)
D B
38 39 40 41 42 43

B Floor Line 1.00 (2 25.4)

9.73 (247.14) o 14.11 (358.4) or 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5)
5.00 (127.0) 3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills il Supplied Only When Specified 3.00 (76 76.2)
Floor Line 1.00 (25.4)

9.73 (247.14) or 14.11 (358.4) 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5)
5.00 (1 (127.0)
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills 3.00 0 Supplied Only When Specified (76 2 (76.2)
10.50 0 (266.7 7)
Location of Neutral Bus When Specified
10.50 (266.7) 266 7
Location of Neutral B Bus When Specified
Figure 30.1-4. Side View A Front Mounted Only

Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only. When location not specied, MTB supplied at the bottom. Standard structure arrangement in front Without MTB; A & B = 9 (228.6) With MTB at bottom; A & B = 9 (228.6) With MTB at top; A = 15 (381.0), B = 3 (76.2)
Figure 30.1-5. Side View B Front and Rear Mounted

Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only. When location not specied, MTB supplied at the bottom. Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure. Standard structure arrangement in front Without MTB; A & B = 9 (228.6) With MTB at bottom; A & B = 9 (228.6) With MTB at top; A = 15 (381.0), B = 3 (76.2) Standard structure arrangement in rear Without MTB; C = 9 (228.6), D = 72 (1828.8), E = 3 (76.2) With MTB at bottom; C = 0, D = 66 (1676.4), E = 9 (228.6) With MTB at top; C = 12 (304.8), D = 60 (1524.0), E = 3 (76.2)
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1265
Home
TOC
Index

Dimensions
30.1-41
Master TOC
22
3 50 3.50 (88.9) ( Removable R bl Top Cover

3 50 3.50 ( .9) (88 Top Conduit Space
5.41 (137.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1.25 (31.8) 17.50 50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0) 1.25 (31.8)
16.00 (406.4)
Vertical Wireway Door 1.25 (31.8) Wire Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) 4.81 (122.2) Vertical Wireway
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 (50.8) .36 (9.1) 16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.5 (88.9). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.5 x 9.73 (444.5 x 247.1). For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic. This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available. Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in FMO structure.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
17.50 (444.5)
1.25 (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 13. 3 97 (354.8) Bottom Conduit Space .70 (17.8)
See Side View A Page 30.1-40 for vertical dimensions.
5.41 (137.4) 6.81 (173.0) 1.58 (40.1) .53 Dia.
30 31 32 33
16.00 (406.4)
2.00 (50.8) .53 Dia.
Figure 30.1-6. 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 16 Inches (406.4 mm) Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)
3.50 (88.9) Top Conduit Space
3.50 (88.9)
Removable Top Cover
34
20.38 (517.7)
5.41 (137.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1.25 (31.8)
35 36 37
Wire Tie Brackets 7.3 31 (185.7) 4.81 (122.2) Vertical Wireway
17.50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0)
Vertical Wireway Door 1.25 (31.8)
1.25 (31.8)
17.50 50 (444.50)
1.25 (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 18.35 (46 66.1) Bottom Conduit Space
38 39 40 41 42 43
5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.8) 5.41 (137.4) 1.58 (40.1) .53 Dia. 16.00 (406.4)
2.00 00 (50.8) .53 Dia. .
.70 (17.8)
Figure 30.1-7. 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Dimensions Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1266
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2.20 (55.9) 3.22 (81.79) Top Conduit Space 5.41 (137.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1.25 (31.8)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 3 50 (88.9) Removable Top Cover
21.00 (533.4)
Front Vertical Wireway Door 17.50 50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0) 1.25 (31.8) 7.3 31 (185.7) Rear Vertical Wireway
4.81 (122.2)
Wire Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) Vertical Wireway
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 (50.8) .36 (9.1) 16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.5 (88.9). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.5 x 14.11 (444.5 x 358.4) in 21-inch deep structure. 7.5 x 9.73 (190.5 x 247.1) in 16-inch deep structure. For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic. This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available. Channel sills supplied only when specied. For seismic loads channel sills if required must be embedded so top of channel sill is still at oor level.
1.25 (31.8)
17.50 50 (444.50)
1.25 (31.8)
29 30 31 32 33
5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.81) 5.41 (137.4)
Removable Bottom Frame Members 18.35 (466.1) Bottom Conduit Space
4.81 (122.2)
See Side View B Page 30.1-40 for vertical dimensions.
.53 Dia.
16.00 (406.4)
2.00 (50.8) .53 Dia.
1.32 (33.5)
Figure 30.1-8. 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep-Front and Rear Mounted
Removable Top Cover
34
Top Conduit Space
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
5.41 (137.4)
20.38 (517.7) or 16.00 (406.4)
Ground Bus Location
12.12 (307.9)
Horizontal Bus Location 3.12 (79.25) 4.62 (117.35) 4.62 (117.35) Removable Bus Barrier
2.25 (57.15)
2.20 1.25 (55.9) (31.8)
7.50 (190.5 5) 10.00 0 00 (254.0) 7.50 (190.5)
1.25 (31.8)
Horizontal Wireway 7.16 inches (181.9 mm) deep
1.25 (31.8)
1.25 (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 18.35 (466.1) or 13.97 (354.8) Bottom Conduit Space .70 (17.8) Floor Line 1.00 (25.4)
9.73 (247.14) or 14.11 (358.4) 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5)
Flat Cover Supplied on Rear of Front Mounted Only Structure
5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.81) 5.41 (137.4) 1.58 (40.1) .53 Dia. (2) 5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
3.00 (76.2)
10.50 (266.7)
Figure 30.1-9. 10 Inches (254.0 mm) Wide, 16 or 21 Inches (406.4 or 533.4 mm) Deep Transition Structure
For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1267
Home
TOC
Index

Dimensions
30.1-43
Master TOC
Right-Hand Drawing 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 18.38 (466.9)
0.50 (12.7)
1.25 (31.8)
18.60 (472.5)
22 23
18.00 (457.2)
19.22 (488.2)
Corner Enclosure
16.00 (406.4)
24
1.25 (31.8) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4) 20.00 (508.0)
Top & Bottom Conduit / Wire Space
1.25 (31.8)
25 26 27
20.00 (508.0) Front
4.78 (121.4) (Ref)
5.40 (137.2) 2.00 (50.8) 0.00 2.00 (50.8)
28 29 30 31 32
20.00 (508.0)
Corner Enclosure
16.00 (406.4) 20.00 (508.0) Right-Hand Drawing
0.00 2.00 (50.8) 4.00 (101.6) (Ref)
5.65 (143.6) 4.62 (117.4)
1.25 (31.8) 18.60 (472.5)
19.22 (488.2)
19.22 (488.2)
11.48 (291.6) Horizontal Bus Location
Figure 30.1-10. 16-Inch (406.4 mm) Deep Front and Rear Mounted Corner Structure
0.50 (12.7) Right-Hand Drawing 24.38 (616.7) 20.00 (508.0) 24.38 (616.7) 21.00 (533.4) 1.25 (31.8) 22.97 (538.4)
33 34
22.76 (578.1)
23.60 (599.4)
Corner Enclosure
3.49 (88.7)
22.38 (568.5)
35 36
21.00 (533.4) 20.00 (508.0) Top & Bottom Conduit / Wire Space 1.25 (31.8) 12.19 (309.6) 1.25 (31.8)
37 38 39 40
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8)
20.00 (508.0) Front
5.40 (137.2) 4.78 (121.4) (Ref)
24.38 (616.7)
Corner Enclosure
21.00 (533.4) 20.00 (508.0) Right-Hand Drawing
0.00
41 42 43
23.60 (599.4)
2.00 (50.8)
0.00
5.65 (143.5) 4.62 (117.4)
1.25 (31.8) 22.97 (583.4)
23.60 (599.4)
4.00 (101.6) (Ref)
11.48 (291.6) Horizontal Bus Location
Figure 30.1-11. 21-Inch (533.4 mm) Deep Front and Rear Mounted Corner Structure

Dimensions
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1268
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
.5) 1.75 (44.5 Lower Horizontal Wireway Door 2.25 (57.2 .2) 95.25 5 (2 2419.4) 90.00 (22 2286.0 6.0) 1.88 (47.8) 4.25 (108.0) Top Conduit Space 3.50 0 (88.9) C L 3.50 (88.9) .18 (4.6) 6
SECTION A-A 23 50 23.50 (599 4) (599.
Minimum Rated Vertical Bus Supplied on Front Mounted Only Structures .18 (4.6) Vertical V Ve Wireway Wire Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) 4.25 (108.0)
2.87 (72.9) 7.97 (204.2) 20.30 (515.6) 28.85 (732.8)
4.81 (122.2) 9.80 (248.9) 25 75 25. (654.1) 2.25 (5 57.2 .2) 28.85 (732. 32 8)
1.75 (44.5) n
Upper Horizontal Wireway Door
4.82 (122.4)
Ve Vertical V Bus Location 4.62 (117.3)
2.38 (60.5)
2.12 (53.8)
Vertical V Ve Wireway 94.62 (2 2403.3) 1.25 (31.8) Max. 5.00 (127.0) 2.25 (57.2) Floor Line 15.69 (398.5) 4.31 (109.5) 20 (508.0) B 1.56 (39.6) .75 (19.1)
Channel Sills 4 x 1.56 (101.6 x 39.6) Detail 2
.75 (19.1) 24.85 (631.2) 2)
01 02 03
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

1.75 4.00 0 (44.5) (101.6 6) .75 (19.1)
24.85 (631.2) 2) 14.0 04
1.88 (47.8) Bottom Conduit Space
4.00 (101.6) Location of Neutral Bus When Specified
23 35 23.35 (593.1) (593 24.85 (631.2) Detail 1
5.00 (127.0) 5.78 (146.8) 5.00 (127.0) 3.78 (96.0 (96.0) 3.00 0 (76 6.2) 2 17.50 (444.5) 23.50 (596.9) .75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2) 3.75 (95 3 (95.3) 24.85 15.78 (631.2) (400.8) 23.35 (593.1)
16.00 (406.4)
3 75 3. (95.3) 95 3
Figure 30.1-12. Freedom Series 2100 Motor Control Center Outline and Floor Plan NEMA 3R 28.85-Inch (732.8 mm) Deep Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 inches (50.8 mm). 38 (9.7 mm) 16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.5 inches (88.9 mm). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 15.78 x 16.6 inches (400.8 x 421.6 mm). Master terminal block assembly furnished for type C wiring only. When location not specied MTB supplied at the bottom. Recommended standard anchor bolting for Detail 1. When channel sills are used see Detail 2. This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available. Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure. Standard structure arrangement (In front) without master terminal block, A and B 9 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom, A and B 9 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A 15 inches (381.0 mm), B 3 inches (76.2 mm).
Note: Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1269
Home
TOC
Index

Motor Control Center Layout Form
30.1-45
Master TOC
Table 30.1-90. Arrangement of Structures (Numbered from Left to Right) Typical Dimensions: Indoor 20-Inch (508.0 mm) W, 90-Inch (2286.0 mm) H; Outdoor 23.5-Inch (596.9 mm) W, 95.25-Inch (2419.4 mm) H
A B C D E F G H J K L M (STR#) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Shipping Split (When Desired) Future Space Only Unusable Space Unit No. Starter Size HMCP Class or Feeder Description Breaker or Switch Amperes hp Extra Intlks. Control Devices Pushbutton Selector Switches Indicating Lights Red (Run, Fwd, Fast) Meters Nameplate Identications A B C D E F G H J K L M
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Amber (Rev. Slow)
Transformer Type
Green (Stopped)
Extra VA on CPT
Fast-Slow-Stop
Hand-Off-Auto
Fwd-Rev-Stop
Fast-Off-Slow
Elapsed Time
Push-To-Test
Fwd-Off-Rev
Start-Stop
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
NO NC
CA08104001E
Ammeter
On-Off

Home TOC Index
June 2006
Sheet 1270
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
This page intentionally left blank.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1271
Home
TOC
Index
Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Intelligent Technologies

General Description
The MCC enclosure consists of a strong and rigid steel channel framework assembled into standardized vertical sections and bolted together to form a complete shipping section of up to 80-inch (2032.0 mm) maximum, four structures each. Structures include horizontal and vertical bus, insulation and isolation barriers, horizontal and vertical isolated wiring troughs, cable entrance areas and space for inserting starter and control equipment. All control units, removable or xed mounted, are assembled with CutlerHammer components of proven safety, quality and reliability. All components are wired in accordance with NEC and UL standards. Specically designed bus stabs, insertion guides, handle mechanisms and safety interlocks are added to form a standardized plug-in unit which meets the highest safety standards.
30.2-1
Master TOC
IT. 2100 Series Motor Control Center
Ordering Information
Replacement plug-in units should be ordered by description indicating:
s s s s s s s
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Old General Order number/factory order number. MCC model. Type of plug-in unit. Required features. Circuit breaker or fuse rating. Schematic reference, if any. Motor data.
NEMA Classications (ICS 3, Part 1)

Class I Control Centers
A mechanical grouping of combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other units arranged in a convenient assembly. Connections from the common horizontal power bus to the units are included. Interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices is not included. Only diagrams of the individual units are supplied. When master terminal blocks are specied, a sketch showing general location of terminals is provided.
General Description
Introduction
Eatons IT. Motor Control Centers provide the highest level of quality and innovation for group Motor Control. 24 Vdc based electromechanical and solid-state motor control are the basis for the industrys highest available starter density per structure. A full range of communication choices is made possible.
IT. 2100 Series MCCs may be applied on electrical systems up to 600 V, 50 or 60 Hz having available fault currents of up to 100,000 amperes rms. Freedom dc Motor Control Centers are available up to 250 Vdc, having available fault currents up to 22,000 amperes rms. Enclosure designs include NEMA 1 Gasketed, 2, 12 and 3R. An ongoing temperature and short circuit design test program, as required by UL 845, ensures a quality product that meets the latest safety codes.
Class II Control Centers

The same as Class I, but designed to form a complete control system. They include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring between units and interlocking provisions to remotely mounted devices. A suitable diagram illustrating operation of the control associated with the motor control center will be provided. When master terminal blocks are specied, the terminal arrangement and required wiring connections are shown on the diagram.
Replacement MCC Units

In addition to fully assembled, freestanding MCC lineups, replacement MCC plug-in units are available for:
s s s s s s s s s
Features
s s s s s s s s
UL label. 42, 65 and 100 kAIC ratings. Molded Case, Insulated Case and Air Circuit Breakers. 3200 A maximum horizontal bus. Self protecting 24 Vdc control circuits. Highest hp per structure density in the industry. Integrated control and communication bus. Communication via multiple control and diagnostic networks.
Description
Motor Control Centers (MCCs) provide the best method for grouping motor control as well as associated distribution equipment. Eatons Cutler-Hammer Freedom and Advantage, IT. 2100 Series Control Centers are specially designed to operate machinery, industrial processes and commercial building systems.
Westinghouse 11-300, built from 1950. Westinghouse Type W, built from 1965. Westinghouse Five Star, built from 1975. Westinghouse Series 2100, built since 1986. Westinghouse Advantage, built since 1991. Cutler-Hammer 9800, built from 1956. Cutler-Hammer F10, built from 1972. Cutler-Hammer Freedom, built since 1988. Cutler-Hammer Freedom Series 2100, built since 1995.
NEMA Types of Wiring

Type A includes no terminal blocks. Combination line starters are factory wired and assembled in the structure in the most efcient arrangement. Auxiliary devices can be supplied wired or unwired as specied. All feeder circuit breaker or fusible disconnect units are in this classication. Type B duplicates Type A except that all control wires terminate at blocks on the side or near the bottom of each unit. Load terminals are all conveniently located adjacent to the control terminal blocks on size 1 units only. Plug-in type terminal blocks are standard for all control wiring. Type C all factory supplied control terminals and load terminals for size 1 and 2 starters are brought to a master terminal block located in the structure.
A complete plug-in unit for adding to an existing MCC includes the plug-in unit, hinged door, isolating divider pan, and all necessary installation hardware.
Note: Mounting hardware for old CutlerHammer MCCs is sold separately. Since MCC UL 845 standard was established in 1975, most standard replacement plug-in units will have UL labels.
CA08104001E
30.2-2 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Intelligent Technologies

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1272
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Structures
horizontal wireways available at top and bottom for wiring. The balance of vertical compartments, 72 inches (1828.8 mm), is available for mounting of control units. This space can provide up to 12 6-inch (152.4 mm) high (X spaces) or any combination thereof.
Note: In the rear of common vertical bus back-to-back structures, the top horizontal wireway is 15 inches (381.0 mm) high and the bottom wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm). This means that back-to-back structures have only 66 inches (1676.4 mm) 11X of usable space in the rear. 72-inch (1828.8 mm) 12X of mounting space is available with a 3-inch (76.2 mm) bottom wireway. two front mounted only structures can be supplied in a back-to-back conguration, allowing 12X rear usable space (depth dimension will increase).
The NEMA Type 3R Rainproof and Sleet Resistant Outdoor consists of a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure mounted on a special base with an outdoor house erected around and over it. Non-walk-in, walk-in aisle and tunnel types are available. The NEMA Type 12 Dust-tight and Driptight Indoor has gasketed material around all doors, door cutouts, cover plates, side, top and back sheets. A gasketed bottom plate is provided with this enclosure. This construction provides maximum protection against airborne matter and dripping liquids. Indoor enclosures comply with NEC UL 845s Two Meter Rule when the bottom of the MCC is at the same level as the operators platform. MCC elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. Handle extensions are optionally available and may be installed on-site.
Special Structures
In addition to the standard 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure, extra wide structures are available in 4-inch (101.6 mm) increments up to 40 inches (1016.0) wide.
Standard Structure Side View
Construction
The standard vertical structure is 90 inches (2286.0 mm) high and 20 inches (508.0 mm) wide. Front mounted only structures can be either 16 inches (406.4 mm) or 21 inches (533.4 mm) deep. Back-to-back unit mounting is 21 inches (533.4 mm) deep. The structure framework is made of 12-gauge formed steel channels. The subframes for the front and rear of each structure are welded. These subframes are then bolted to longitudinal members to form the complete frame which is rigid and self-supporting. Side, back and roof covers of 14-gauge steel are mounted with screw fasteners for quick and easy removal. All doors are 14-gauge steel with a 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) ange to provide a rigid, secure closure for all openings. Doors mounted on removable pin hinges are provided on all unit compartments. Vertical wireways, top horizontal wireways and bottom horizontal wireways are standard. The unit pan forms the top barrier of each unit space. In conjunction with the unit wrapper, this provides isolation between adjacent units and wireways. The guide rails are an integral part of this pan and provide precise alignment of the unit stabs on the vertical bus.
Reduced height structures, in increments of 6 inches (152.4 mm) 1X from 90 to 54 inches (2286.0 to 1371.6 mm), are available for applications with limited access. Another special structure is a transition section between Type W and the IT. Series. This structure is 10 inches (254.0 mm) wide to provide for horizontal bus splicing.
Vertical Wireway
A vertical wireway is provided in each structure. Located on the right side, it extends the full 90-inch (2286.0 mm) height of the structure. The width of the wireway is 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm) at the rear of the vertical frame members. Overall depth of the wireway is 8 inches (203.2 mm) providing a cross-sectional area of nearly 35 square inches (889.0 square mm) to easily accommodate control and load wiring. Supports are provided at suitable intervals to secure all wiring and cables. Optional 8-inch (203.2 mm) wide wireways are available. This conguration provides a 64 square inch (1625.6 square mm) cross sectional area and is ideal for structures with large starters. Structures with 8-inch (203.2 mm) wireways are 24-inches (609.6 mm) wide and can only accommodate front mounted units. The doors swing open 115 and opposite to the unit doors for maximum accessibility. The doors are mounted on concealed removable pin hinges for quick detachment and are secured in the closed position by spring-loaded quarter-turn indicating type fastener.
Paint
All enclosure parts are thoroughly cleaned and given a phosphatizing treatment to inhibit rust and to prime the metal for the nish coating. A 2 mil thick electrostatic powder paint coat is applied to all surfaces. The paint type and process meets UL 1332 for electrical equipment steel enclosures. All exterior enclosure covers and doors are painted ANSI 61 gray (Munsel No. 8.3G/6.10/0.54). For improved interior visibility, the interior of the enclosure and plug-in units are painted white (Munsel No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).
Enclosures
The standard enclosure type is NEMA Type 1 Gasketed General Purpose Indoor. This enclosure is appropriate for installations with normal atmospheric conditions. The NEMA Type 2 Drip-proof Indoor employs a special roof panel with a drip shield and water channels. This prevents liquid from dripping onto the front of the control center.
Standard Structure Arrangements

Standard structural height is 90 inches (2286.0 mm) with 9-inch (228.6 mm)
8-Inch (203.2 mm) Wireway
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1273
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
30.2-3
Master TOC
Horizontal Wireways
Vertical Bus
The vertical bus is available in ratings of 300, 600, 800 and 1200 amperes for front mounted only, and 600, 800 and 1200 amperes for back-to-back mounted. Vertical bus bars are tin-plated copper only. Vertical bus of the incoming section will match the horizontal bus when applicable. Isolation of the Freedom Series 2100 vertical bus compartment from the unit compartment is accomplished by a full height barrier. This is a single sheet of glass-reinforced polyester with cutouts to allow the unit stabs to engage the vertical bus. Snap-in covers are available for the cutout openings to provide total isolation during maintenance procedures .
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Top Horizontal Wireway
Vertical Bus Conguration
Bottom Horizontal Wireway
The top front horizontal wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm) high and 8 inches (203.2 mm) deep in front mounted only structures and in the front of back-to-back mounted structures. It extends the full width of each structure and is totally isolated from the main horizontal bus. The bottom horizontal wireway is 9 inches (228.6 mm) high and extends the full depth of the structure. The entire oor area under the control center is open for unrestricted conduit entry. For top entry, the top wireway can be increased to 15 inches (381.0 mm) high, reducing the bottom wireway height to 3 inches (76.2 mm). For back-to-back unit mounted, the rear top horizontal wireway is 15 inches (381.0 mm) high and 5 inches (127.0 mm) deep. All horizontal wireway openings are covered by doors for increased accessibility. Each door is mounted with removable pin hinges to allow quick detachment.
The vertical bus provides 3-phase power distribution from the main horizontal bus into the vertical compartments. The bus is a unique angular conguration with an L shape for front mounted only structures and a Z shape for back-to-back. These shapes have the inherent mechanical strength to withstand fault stresses. They also provide a smooth stabbing surface for unit connection.
Isolation Barrier
36 37 38
MCC Bus Layout
Bus System
The bus system is designed to efciently distribute power throughout the MCC and provides inherent mechanical strength in the event of faults. Due to the high strength capability of the bus bars, bus bracing at 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical is standard. Optional bracing is available at 42,000 and 100,000 amperes rms. Bus braces are molded from a glass-reinforced polyester material which is non-tracking and impervious to moisture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions.
Standard Isolation Barrier Rear View
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

General Description
When insulation and isolation of the vertical bus is required, a labyrinth design barrier, as shown on the next page, is available. This barrier is molded glass-reinforced polyester and forms a labyrinth around the bus bars to prevent fault propagation. This design provides maximum protection against phase-to-phase insulation breakdown. Thermal efciency is maintained by a close tolerance t between the bus bars and the barrier which minimizes air pockets. The labyrinth barrier is standard for IT. MCCs. An automatic shutter mechanism can be provided with the labyrinth barrier for complete isolation of the vertical bus. The shutter moves automatically to cover the stab openings when a unit is removed. This provides maintenance personnel with maximum protection since the vertical bus is never exposed. As the unit is reinserted in the compartment, the shutter moves sideways to uncover the stab openings in the barrier.
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1274
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
dc Bus
24 Vdc vertical bus is provided in back structure to power each unit and provide vertical ground bus connection. Bus (dc) is 50 ampere rated, tin-plated copper.
The horizontal main bus is isolated from the top horizontal wireway compartment by an isolation barrier. This two-piece steel barrier extends to the full width of each vertical structure. The two-piece design allows access to bus connections without the removal of the entire barrier, for added maintenance convenience. The bus bar layout permits front access to all bus connections. This allows maintenance personnel to make splices and check splice bolt torques from the front of the structure.
Neutral Assemblies
dc Bus
Horizontal Bus
Neutral Bus (Bottom)
For 3-phase, 4-wire applications, a neutral landing pad is provided as standard. This is a 100% rated neutral. As an option, half or fully rated neutral bus can be supplied in the bottom of the entire MCC.
Ground Bus
Horizontal Bus
35 36 37 38 39
Labyrinth Barrier
The main horizontal bus provides 3-phase power distribution from the incoming line or primary disconnect device to each vertical structure in the motor control center. The bus bars are mounted in a vertical plane, edge to edge. This mounting produces an exceptionally strong assembly, able to withstand high fault current stresses. Standard horizontal bus bracing is 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical. Optional bracing is available at 100,000 amperes rms. Bus braces are molded from high strength glass-reinforced polyester material which is non-tracking and impervious to moisture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions. The main horizontal bus is rated at 600 amperes as standard with ratings of 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 amperes optionally available. Tin-plated copper bus bars are supplied as standard. Silver-plated copper is also available.
Note: 3200 ampere horizontal bus available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65C rise above 40C ambient only.
Ground Bus (Top)
40 41 42 43
Copper ground bus rated 300 amperes 1/4-inch x 3/4-inch (6.4 mm x 19.1 mm) is supplied as standard. Mounting is across the top of each vertical structure in the horizontal wireway. The bus can also be mounted across the bottom when the bottom 9 inches (228.6 mm) are not occupied by units or master terminal blocks. A 1/4-inch x 2-inch (6.4 mm x 50.8 mm) copper vertical ground bus rated 600 amperes is optional. 225 ampere 1/4-inch x 3/4-inch (6.4 mm x 19.1 mm) vertical tin-plated only copper ground bus is available. Located in the vertical bus area, it provides direct starter unit grounding.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1275
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
30.2-5
Master TOC
Units
General
Starter units are combination type employing a linestarter and a disconnect device of proven capability. The disconnect device can be a motor circuit protector, circuit breaker or fusible switch. Eatons Cutler-Hammer Type HMCP motor circuit protector is furnished as standard. The HMCP and starter combination has a 65,000 rms symmetrical ampere short-circuit current rating as standard at 480 V. Starter units are available with optional 100,000 ampere shortcircuit current rating. Series C thermalmagnetic circuit breakers (65 kAIC, or optional 100 kAIC) for starter units are also available. The fusible switch disconnect device is the Type K. It is a quick-make, quickbreak, visible blade switch with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual element, rejection type, NEMA Class J or R fuses. Rejection fuse clips for Class RK-5 fuses are standard. Power fuses are not included as standard. Both breaker and fuse selection must take into consideration the total shortcircuit capacity of the system to which the control center is connected. Each starter unit includes a tin-plated copper corrosion-resistant safety ground stab that makes connection before the power stabs engage the vertical bus.
Units ac Drives
Units Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
22 23 24 25 26
SSRV Starter 135 A
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage (SSRV) Starters are designed to reduce the inrush current to a motor during starting and limit the amount of available starting torque, thus reducing mechanical wear and utility demand requirements. The amount of starting current is eld adjustable to match the specic requirements of all applications. IT. SSRV Controllers are available with a wide variety of standard features: Kick start, soft stop, phase loss and stall protection. IT. SSRV Starters are 30 70% smaller than competitive designs.
Typical applications include conveyors, compressors, machine tools, pumps and fans.
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Units Starters
FVNR Size 1
IT. starter units are equipped with IT. electromechanical starters and contactors NEMA Sizes 1 7. The advanced microprocessor-based OL relay provides Class 10, 20 and 30 overload, phase loss and phase unbalance protection. These features can be enabled and disabled using adjustment dials on the starter.
Adjustable Frequency Drives are available from .5 hp to 1100 hp for control of standard ac motors in processes that benet from the ability to change motor speed. Use of Inverter Duty motors is recommended. Controllers are available to handle constant torque applications, such as conveyors and crushers, and variable torque applications, such as fans and pumps. Control schemes are available for volts/Hz, open loop vector and closed loop vector models. SVX9000 drive units include as standard: line reactors and a door-mounted keypad. Units up to 150 hp VT have a standard output reactor for V/DT ltering. MVX drive units include as standard: a line reactor, viewing window for drive display, and an output lter. All drive structures are bus connected which allows for expansion of the MCC on both sides of the structure. A wide range of AFD features and options are available to meet the requirements of most applications. AFDs are available in NEMA 1A.
Feeder Tap Units
250 A 6-Inch Unit
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Feeder tap units may contain either circuit breakers or fusible switches. Drawout breaker units include the xed trip Type ED, single-mounted in ratings through 125 amperes and the interchangeable trip Types J250 and HKD single-mounted through 250 and 400 amperes respectively. Larger Series C circuit breakers with ratings to 2500 A are xed mounted. Fusible feeder tap units utilize the CutlerHammer Type K visible blade disconnect switch. Fused switches are mounted in drawout units through 400 amperes. Fixed mounted switch ratings of 600 and 800 amperes are also available. All switches are supplied with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual-element rejection type. Types of fuses include Class J, R or L. Power fuses are not supplied as standard.
CA08104001E

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1276
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26
Stab Assembly
Handle Mechanism
Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanism Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
A tin-plated copper alloy stab incorporates the ultimate in mechanical simplicity to provide precise control of contact pressure on the bus. This ensures a positive connection, yet permits easy unit insertion and withdrawal. Self-aligning stabs are mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic insulation block which totally shrouds each stab and absolutely ensures positive alignment of the stabs with the vertical bus. The insulation block is also an integral part of the phase-tophase isolation system. Power wiring is welded to the stabs and is totally contained within the unit enclosure. This means the vertical bus compartment is completely free of wiring for maximum safety and reliability. Stab assemblies are accurately matched to the electrical requirements of each individual unit and are provided in 60, 150, 300 or 400 ampere ratings (plug-in through Size 5). In addition to the 3-phase power stabs there is a 24 Vdc stab and a ground stab. The 24 Vdc stab includes a fuseless crowbar circuit which provides control power protection and unit isolation when a short circuit is created. When a short occurs in the control circuit the crowbar feature will interrupt the power in a safe manner. The control power will automatically be restored when the short circuit is removed. Units that use Eatons Cutler-Hammer QCPort communication include a communication stab.
The handle mechanism is designed to provide a high mechanical leverage so that little effort is required to operate any device. The standard handle mechanism is a vertical motion type device with four positions; ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET. Only circuit breaker types have tripped and reset positions. It is securely mounted to the front of the unit and mechanically connected to the breaker or fusible switch, eliminating alignment problems. It provides a positive indication of the breaker or switch position, even with the door open.
Padlocking Bar
The handle mechanism provides several safety features:

s
Unit Insertion Interlock
The handle and exterior front panel are molded from the same plastic material as the device panel. A textured surface preserves the appearance. The ON position indicator is at the top and is a bright red. The OFF/RESET position is at the bottom and is bright green. The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is in the middle, between the ON and OFF position. All position indicator colors contrast with the black background and are highly visible even at considerable distances. The operating handle is designed for rugged duty and solid operator feel.
In the ON position, an interlock prevents the unit door from being opened. A door interlock defeater screw located to the right of the handle is provided to enable authorized maintenance personnel access to the units when required. s The unit insertion interlock is located to the left of the operating handle. The interlock must be in the locked position in order to turn the disconnect on. When the interlock is in the locked position, the unit cannot be withdrawn or inserted. s To ensure that units are not energized accidentally or by unauthorized personnel, the handle mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. Sufcient space is available for a maximum of three padlocks. Where critical processes are involved and to prevent unauthorized shutdown, the handle mechanism can be modied to enable padlocking in the ON position. Each unit has a safe lock position. This interlock will lock the unit in a position off the 480 volt bus and ensure the unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1277
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
The unit wrapper is designed to provide ample space for cable entry from the wireway to the unit. The unit wrapper has two mounting rails, one on each side, which support the unit in the structure. They engage guide rails located near the top of each unit space. This mounting rail system produces minimum friction and allows units to be inserted and withdrawn easily. The guide rails also give precise alignment to the unit for accurate stabbing on the vertical bus.
30.2-7
Master TOC
Device Panel
FVNR, FVR, 2-speed and SSRV starter units have 11 terminal blocks running front to back which are used for starter control function. Additional 6-point control terminal blocks run top to bottom and are used for auxiliary contacts and other auxiliary components. All other units have only the 6-point latching blocks. A 12-inch (304.8 mm) high (2X-space) starter unit accommodates up to four side-mounted terminal blocks plus the 11-point block, providing a maximum of 35-points. Larger units accommodate three additional 6-point terminal blocks for every additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) 1X-space of unit height 6-inch (152.4 mm) units accommodate one 6-point side-mounted terminal block, plus the 11-point block providing a total of 17 points.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Unit Device Panel
The device panel can accommodate up to 5 membrane buttons (including reset) and 7 LED indicating lights. These devices are a part of the handle mechanism. The location of this device ensures access to all parts of the unit for maintenance.
Terminal Blocks
A side mounted, six-circuit, latching pull-apart terminal block is standard on units with NEMA Type B or C wiring. This industrial grade Eatons CutlerHammer MCC terminal block provides solid electrical connections while conserving space and making installation and maintenance easier. Terminal blocks are mounted in knockouts on the vertical wireway side of the unit housing affording greater access to the unit compartment and interior components. The two-piece terminal block snap-locks together to ensure permanent circuit continuity.
Nameplates
Unit nameplates are engraved with 3/16-inch (4.8 mm) high white lettering on a black background. They are heat and crack resistant to eliminate the need for replacement. Nameplates are mounted with stainless steel self-tapping screws.
Unit Wrapper
Interface Module
Side-Mounted Latching Terminal Block
Plug-in Unit Wrapper
The unit wrapper back is fabricated of 14-gauge steel. After fabrication, it is cleaned and given a rust inhibiting phosphatizing treatment. The nish on a unit wrapper is a baked Munsel No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23 white. This is highly durable nish, gloss-white in color to increase visibility within the unit and facilitate wiring and maintenance procedures. The unit wrapper consists of a threesided rugged steel shell including the mounting base for the unit components. The smallest unit measures 13-3/4 inches (349.3 mm) wide, 8 inches (203.2 mm) deep and 6 inches (152.4 mm) high. Units increase in 6-inch (152.4 mm) increments to a maximum height of 72 inches (1828.8 mm).
CA08104001E
Heavy-duty rising box terminals are of a design which eliminates loose connections caused by expansion and contracting of the conductor as the current is switched on and off. This unique design maintains constant pressure as the wire expands and contracts. This 300 V, 15 A rated terminal block will accept 12 AWG stripped wires. All terminal block conductors are fully shielded for added safety and cleanliness.
Control connections to the starter using the 11-pin terminal block is made through a eld interface module. The eld interface modules are available as either 24 Vdc or 120 Vac devices. The eld interface module, device panel, starter and dc bus are connected inside the unit using premade cable assemblies. These cables have snap-lock keyed connectors on both ends to ensure an accurate and reliable connection. Cables are 1000 V rated Teon insulated white wire auxiliary contacts. Other control devices are wired using 16 AWG control wire. Rated 105C, the ame retardant thermoplastic insulated wire is red. Power wiring is black and sized to carry the maximum full load current of the starter unit.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1278
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Motor/Load Terminal Blocks
Doors 2X and larger are held closed with a minimum of two quarter-turn indicating type fasteners. They securely hold the door in the closed position, yet allow quick and easy access to the unit when required. The fasteners provide a visual indication of the latched position. The head slot of the fastener is designed to prevent screwdriver slippage.
Power factor correction capacitors. Automatic transfer switches. s DeviceNet Communications. s PowerNet Communications. s Modbus Communications: u Modbus TCP u Modbus RTU
s s
PanelMate industrial Operator Interface. s Industrial PCs.

s
Control and Load Terminations
Spring-Loaded Unit Door 1/4 Turn Latch
29
Load Terminal Block
Options
As an option, starter units up to NEMA Size 4 and other unit up to 180 amperes, can be provided with motor/load terminal blocks. These terminals are x mounted to the MCC structure and are connected to the control device through an additional set of unit stabs. This ensures the rapid change out of units without having to disconnect the motor/load leads. Starter and feeder tap units can be modied to meet a variety of specication requirements. Some typical components which can be added include: control power transformers with two primary and one secondary control fuses, control relays, CEP7 or IQ 500 (solid-state overload) relays, ground fault relays, current transformers, extra electrical interlocks, pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, circuit breaker shunt trip or undervoltage release and auxiliary switches. In most cases, one of these modications does not increase starter unit size.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Master Terminal Blocks at Bottom (Class C Wiring)
For NEMA Type A wiring, each unit is assembled and devices interwired. Terminal blocks are not supplied and control and load wiring is internal to the unit. For NEMA Type B wiring, control wires are terminated at blocks within the unit. Refer to the discussion of units for types of terminal blocks available. For NEMA Type C-S wiring, control, and size 1 and 2 starter load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located at the top or bottom of each vertical structure. The mounting location of the master terminal block in front mounted only structures is in the existing horizontal wireway space at the top or at the bottom as shown above. When mounting is made in an incoming line section, 12 inches (304.8 mm) of unit space must be used. When mounting is made in the rear of back-to-back mounted structures, 6 inches (152.4 mm) of unit space must be used at the bottom and 12 inches (304.8 mm) at the top. Master terminal blocks are rack mounted to permit removal of entire assembly for ease of wiring during installation and maintenance. For NEMA Type C-M wiring control and size 1 and 2 starter load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located in a separate marshaling structure.
Unit Doors
Additional Equipment
In addition to motor starter and feeder units, additional equipment can be supplied including the following:
s
6-Inch (152.4 mm) Unit Door
Unit doors are formed of 14-gauge steel with a 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) ange on all four sides. The ange adds rigidity to the door and provides a surface to contain door gasketing. Cutouts are made in the door as required to accommodate the operating handle and device panel. The doors are cleaned, phosphatized and given a nish of gray, baked on enamel ANSI 61. The doors will open 115 opposite to the wireway doors permitting optimum access to the unit compartment. The doors are mounted on removable concealed pin hinges. This permits quick removal of any door in a vertical structure without disturbing adjacent doors.
s s
Single-phase dry-type distribution transformers in ratings of .5, .75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 and 45 kVA. 3-phase dry-type distribution transformers in ratings of 9, 15, 25, 30 and 45 kVA. Lighting panelboards with up to 42 circuits with either plug-in branch breakers or bolt-on branch breakers, 120/240 V, 120/208 V or 480 V, singleor 3-phase. Current limiting reactors with ohmic values of .01, .015, .02 and .025, and ampere ratings of 600, 800, 1000 and 1200. Metering equipment including the Eatons Cutler-Hammer IQ family of solid-state power monitors, voltmeters and ammeters. Active Harmonic Correction Units. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) units.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1279
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
IQ 200 includes all of the functions of the IQ 320 Meter. The door mounted display is smaller, making the IQ 200 ideal for use on individual starter and drive units. IQ DP-4000 includes all of the functions of the IQ 320 plus THD readings for voltage and current. Additionally, the IQ DP-4130 includes contact inputs and outputs. This device is ideal for incoming line monitoring.
30.2-9
Master TOC
Incoming Line
Incoming line cables entering the MCC from either the top or bottom can be easily terminated onto main lugs or connected to a main disconnect. All incoming line sections comply with NEC wiring bending requirements as adopted by UL.
Surge TVSS
22 23 24 25 26
Main Lugs Only (MLO)

Up to 1200 ampere rated horizontal bus, cables, up to four per phase, are terminated on crimp or screw lugs mounted on adapters solidly bolted to fully rated vertical bus. Top entry cables are terminated at the top of the MCC and bottom entry cables are conveniently terminated near the bottom. Table 30.2-76 shows spacing requirements for various cable congurations. MLO termination for 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200 amperes requires a full vertical section.
Note: 3200 ampere main lugs only available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65C rise above 40C ambient only.
IQ Analyzer provides extensive metering, power quality analysis, remote input monitoring, control relaying, analog input/outputs, and is communications capable. A display provides the exibility of exhibiting large characters with high visibility and small characters for detailed descriptions.
These IQ power monitors each contain their own voltage power pack for systems up to 600 V. Therefore, separate potential transformers are not required. Either two or three separate current transformers must be used. All IQ power monitors are communications capable. Refer to Section 3 for further details. Power Xpert is a meter available with communication features for power management and system software integration in addition to a Web interface. Customers and facility personnel can view the metering data using a standard PC Web browser. The new platform offers advanced functionality like transient capture, high sampling rate, open communications, Web server gateway, eld upgradable rmware, expandable memory and optional I/O.
TVSS (Clipper Power System) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Visor Series TVSS units feature advanced thermodynamic fusing technology and intelligent monitor options in 12, 18-inch space factors. All TVSS units (100 500 kA) meet UL 449, 2nd edition and UL 1283. Internal fuse protection is up to 200 kAIC. Standard MCC offering includes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C contact, alarm enable and disable.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Main Disconnects
Incoming cables may also be easily terminated on a main circuit breaker or fused switch. A variety of molded case or encased circuit breakers are available. Tables 30.2-54 through 30.2-59 show spacing requirements for various main devices.
Automatic Transfer Switches
Metering
Power Supplies
Automatic Transfer Switch IQ Analyzer
Eatons Cutler-Hammer IQ family of metering and power monitors includes: IQ 320 microprocessor-based 3-phase power monitor replaces the traditional ammeter, voltmeter and instrument switches. Displays phase currents, voltage, L-L, L-N, power real and reactive apparent, power factor, frequency, energy, watthours, varhours, VA-hours.
Dual Power Supply Bucket
Cutler-Hammer Power Supply Units feature high outrush capability, selfprotecting 24 Vdc output and input voltage range from 120 480 volts. Power supplies are switching power supplies which meet semicondcutor industry spec FH7. This ensures the power supply will ride through a 50% voltage sag for 200 ms. Cutler-Hammer power supplies meet this spec at 150% of load. Each power supply in a unit has its own disconnect switch.
ATVI designs include IQ Transfer doormounted microprocessor-based monitoring device for use in open transition transfer switches where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situations is essential. The IQ Transfer is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be used with Cutler-Hammer transfer switches. This device provides the operator with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. The IQ Transfer continuously monitors either single-phase or 3-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the load.
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1280
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 30.2-1. Clean Control Center Installation Diagram
Alternate CT Placement Harmonic Correction Unit Source XFMR Typical CT Placement
Harmonic Correction
Load(s)
Eatons Cutler-Hammer Clean Control Center utilizes a harmonic correction unit to provide harmonic cancellation directly on the motor control center horizontal bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and injects into the ac lines a synthesized waveform that is inverted compared to the remaining signal. The result is a clean waveform as seen by the upstream electrical system. Single or multiple harmonic correction units may be applied within a Clean Control Center providing an economical solution to excessive harmonics due to ac drives or other non-linear loads. Use of the Clean Control Center will provide compliance to the most stringent 5% Total Demand Distortion (TDD) requirements of IEEE 519. Clean Control Center assemblies include a 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCC structure, Active Harmonic Correction Unit, Current Transformers and a door-mounted digital interface panel.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1281
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
30.2-11
Master TOC
Communications
General
Eatons IT. Motor Control Center (MCC) is designed to allow multiple protocol communications. These include, but are not limited to, a DeviceNet and Cutler-Hammers PowerNet. DeviceNet is a control eld network that allows users to control and monitor devices in the MCC. PowerNet is a power monitoring network which allows users to monitor meter breakers and other power distribution equipment. The use of these networks signicantly reduces eld wiring and speeds up installation and commissioning of the motor control center.
22 23
QCPort Communication Bus Power Supply I/O (optional) QCPort Cover Control Module Interface Module DeviceNet Cable DeviceNet Adapter
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Communications DeviceNet
Figure 30.2-2. DeviceNet Using QCPort 63 starters that share a single DeviceNet node (see Figure 30.2-2). If motorcurrent, status and control information is required then one QCPort DNA is required for every 21 starters. If status and control information only is required then one QCPort DNA is required for every 63 starters. An MCC with QCPort devices includes a communications bus located in the vertical bus area of the structure. Each QCPort unit has a communication stab that connects the unit with the communication bus when the unit is inserted. The DeviceNet specication is controlled by the Open Device Vendors Association (ODVA). The DeviceNet system can be controlled from: iPC (industrial personal computer) PC-based control software. s DeviceNet scanner cards designed for leading PLC and DCS systems.
s
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
DeviceNet
IT. MCCs are available with DeviceNet Communications. DeviceNet is a device level open communication network linking DeviceNet-capable control products, such as IT. Starters, Adjustable Frequency Drives, operator interfaces, I/O blocks, IT. soft starters and iPCs. These products are prewired in the MCC with DeviceNet cable (see Figure 30.2-2). Available control and monitoring features of IT. Starters include:
s s s s s s s s s s
QCPort DeviceNet Adapter
ON/OFF control. Control voltage. Trip reset. Trip indication. Cause of trip. % Thermal capacity. 3-phase or average motor current. Trip warning. Breaker status. Ground fault indication.
DeviceNet communications to starter and I/O blocks can be more cost-effectively applied using QCPort connections. QCPort allows multiple devices to be connected to a single DeviceNet node, reducing the number of scanner cards that may be required in an application. A QCPort DeviceNet adapter is located in the power supply unit of a structure and connects a maximum of
CA08104001E

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1282
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Communications Modbus TCP

IT. starters are available with Modbus TCP communications via Ethernet. Modbus TCP is an application layer communication protocol linking Modbus TCP capable products, such as IT. starters, adjustable frequency drives, operator interfaces, I/O blocks, IT. soft starters and iPCs. These products are pre-wired in the MCC with Ethernet cable connecting the various Modbus TCP Gateways to an unmanned switch located in the MCC (see Figure 30.2-3). Available control and monitoring features of IT. starters include:
Communications PowerNet
Additional Services
Startup Assistance
To ensure complete customer satisfaction and to expedite equipment startup for motor control centers, this service provides a factory-trained representative at the job site during equipment energization. This service is provided on a xed price basis. In addition to factory directed startup, the standard equipment warranty is extended for a period of 24 months. This service is especially benecial when solid-state equipment is incorporated within the MCC due to the exibility in adjusting solid-state equipment for each application.
IQ Analyzer
s s s s s s s s s s
ON/OFF control. Control voltage. Trip reset. Trip indication. Cause of trip. % Thermal capacity. 3-phase or average motor current. Trip warning. Breaker status. Ground fault indication.
The IT. MCC is available with the PowerNet communications devices to the following: the IQ family of metering devices, addressable relays and energy sentinels.
Maintenance and Operational Training

A full range of Training and Operational Training programs is available for all types of MCC mounted equipment. In addition, Preventative Maintenance programs are available to ensure years of trouble-free operation.
PLCs
Programmable Controllers can be mounted in the IT. MCCs in a wide variety of congurations. Popular mounting congurations include small PLCs unit mounted to replace relays, medium sized PLCs with I/O for control of an MCC lineup, and remote I/O drops mounted in an MCC and connected to the main CPU via coaxial cable. Due to the exibility of PLCs and the wide variety of applications and congurations, the IT. MCC is designed to meet the mounting requirements of most applications.
Seismic Qualication
Seismic testing has been completed for IT. MCCs. When specied, IT. MCCs are seismically qualied to meet the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC).
Note: Contact Eaton for availability of seismically qualied MCC.
Modbus communications can be more cost-effectively applied using QCPort connections. QCPort allows multiple starters and other I/O devices to be connected to a single Modbus node. A Modbus to QCPort Adapter is located in the power supply unit of a structure and connects a maximum of 1024 registers to the network. Typical starter applications use four registers per starter. Additional register information can be added or deleted as the application demands. An MCC with QCPort devices includes a communication bus located in the vertical bus area of the structure. Each QCPort unit has a communication stab that connects the unit with the communication bus when the unit is inserted. Each of the QCPort Adapters are connected to a centralized industrial switch via Ethernet cable. One port on the switch will be available for customer connection.
Retrots
Existing installations can many times benet from some of the new technology equipment available in todays MCCs. Eaton offers a full range of retrot capabilities to upgrade existing MCC lineups. Examples include: vacuum contactors, reduced voltage solid-state starters, solid-state metering and solid-state overload protection. Starter retrot kits for selective competitor MCCs are also available. Consult factory for availability.
Monitoring and Diagnostic Tools

The IT. MCC allows a user to monitor and troubleshoot the MCC and the connected loads. The network conguration tool is CH Studio. This tool is used in conjunction with an MCC that is already congured for communications. This tool can be run on a customer iPC/PC or run on an iPC mounted in the motor control center. CH Studio provides a graphical interface that shows status of all units in an elevation view. It allows the user to select the behavior of individual starters such as: Custom I/O congurations. Loss of communication behavior (Stop, Forward, Rev, Maintain Last State). s Verify overload settings. s 2-wire or 3-wire control. s Fault indication.
s s
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1283
Home
TOC
Index

General Description
30.2-13
Master TOC
22 23 24
I/O Optional Modbus Adapter Power Supply
25 26 27 28
Ethernet Switch
29 30
QCPort Communication Bus
31
Interface Module
32 33 34
QCPort Cover Control Module Interface Module
35 36
Figure 30.2-3. Modbus TCP Using QCPort
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

General Description
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1284
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Quick Reference Layout Guide Index
Device Space Requirements
Combination Starters, Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Starters, Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option Groups for Combination Starters, Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TVSS (Clipper SuperVisor Power System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DeviceNet Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering and Protection Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Harmonic Correction Clean Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Structures and Structure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Lugs Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Power Supply Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protector, Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Views/Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table
30.2-2 30.2-16 30.2-25 30.2-27 30.2-33 30.2-54 30.2-59 30.2-60 30.2-63 30.2-64 30.2-65 30.2-66 30.2-67 30.2-68 30.2-71 30.2-72 30.2-73 30.2-74 30.2-75 30.2-76 30.2-78 30.2-81 30.2-82 30.2-83
Page
30.2-15 30.2-19 30.2-22 30.2-23 30.2-26 30.2-29 30.2-31 30.2-31 30.2-31 30.2-32 30.2-32 30.2-32 30.2-32 30.2-32 30.2-33 30.2-33 30.2-35 30.2-35 30.2-36 30.2-36 30.2-37 30.2-38 30.2-39 30.2-39 30.2-43
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1285
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.2-15
Master TOC
Technical Data
Table 30.2-1. Short Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480 Volts)
Short Circuit Protective Device HMCP Motor Circuit Protector (Standard Rating) HMCP Motor Circuit Protector (Optional Rating) MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Standard Rating) MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Optional Rating) Fusible Switch Combination Starter FV and RV (kA) 65 100 65 100 100 Solid-State Reduced Voltage (kA) 65 100 65 100 Adjustable Frequency Drives (kA) 65 100 65 100 100
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.2-2. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded Case Circuit Breakers Dimensions in Inches (mm) Motor Circuit Protector Ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efciency) motors. Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208 V 7.5 10 25 40 50 75 25 150 7.5 10 25 40 50 75 125 150 7.5 10 25 40 50 75 7.5 10 25 30 40 50 75 240 V 7.5 15 30 50 60 100 100 200 300 7.5 15 30 50 60 100 100 200 7.5 15 30 50 60 100 7.5 15 30 40 50 60 100 380 V 10 25 50 75 100 150 250 300 10 25 50 75 100 150 250 300 10 25 50 75 100 150 10 25 50 60 75 100 150 480 V 10 25 50 100 125 200 300 350 400 600 10 25 50 100 125 200 300 400 10 25 50 100 125 200 10 25 50 75 100 125 200 600 V 10 25 50 100 150 200 400 600 10 25 50 100 150 200 400 10 25 50 100 150 200 10 25 50 100 150 200 HMCPE Frame MCCB Frame
IT. Unit Size

Inches (mm) X Space 1X 1X 2X 2X 5X 8X 12X 12X 2X 2X 3X 4X
Full Voltage Non-Reversing

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 225 225 225 250 250 400 600 1200 1200 225 225 225 250 250 400 600 1200 225 225 225 225 250 400 150 150 150 150 250 250 400 E E E J HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HND HND E E E J HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HND E E E J HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC
Type T206
6 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) (152.4)
Full Voltage Reversing
Type T216
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 60 (1524.0) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
5 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

10X 12X 12X 2X 3X 4X 4X 12X 2X 3X 4X 4X 12X
Two-Speed One Winding, Constant/Variable Torque
Type T946
12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 72 (1828.8)
Two-Speed Two Winding, Constant/Variable Torque
Type T956
12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 72 (1828.8)
Standard Combination Starter Units with HMCP Magnetic Only disconnect have short circuit ratings of 65,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional HMCP combination starter units are available with 100,000 amperes at 480 volts. Optional Combination Starter Units with Thermal-Magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 amperes or 100,000 amperes at 480 volts. 6-inch (152.4 mm)/1X unit is standard. 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard. 1200 ampere HMCP frame available in 11X 66-inch (1676.4 mm). Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. 30-inch (762.0 mm) space needed for Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker. Requires 36-inch (914.4 mm) wide structure. 36-inch (914.4 mm) space needed for Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker.
Note: For HMCP continuous ampere ratings by motor hp, see Table 30.2-81 on Page 30.2-38.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1286
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Start Controller S701

Eatons solid-state reduced voltage soft start controller uses a manual motor protector, main disconnect in conjunction with the soft start controller. Units can be supplied with one controller or with four or six controllers fed from one main disconnect. Table 30.2-3. Soft Start Controller Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Ampere Rating 3.5 15 25 Maximum Horsepower 208 V 1 3 5 230 V 1 3 5 460 V 2 7.5 15 575 V 2 10 20 HMCP Values 7 15 30 Unit Size Inches (mm) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter HMCP S752

Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. soft starter has three 24 Vdc inputs and one transistor output. IT. soft starter units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.2-4. Standard Duty Ratings Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
IT. Width (mm)

54
Maximum Horsepower 208 V 0.75 2 3 7.5 15 230 V 1 2 3 7.5 15 460 V 2 5 10 20 30 575 V 3 7.5 10 25 40
Table 30.2-5. Severe Duty Ratings Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect

IT. Width (mm)

54
Maximum Horsepower 208 V 0.75 2 2 3 7.5 230 V 1 2 2 5 10 460 V 2 5 5 10 20 575 V 3 7.5 7.5 15 30

Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer Line or Load MOV Protection Bypass Starter Isolation Contractor
Bypass starter or isolation contactor options will t in (3X) 18-inch (457.2 mm) units.
Table 30.2-7. Group-Mounted Controller Option

Maximum Horsepower per Unit at 480 V 2 2 7.5 7.5 Number of Units 4 6 4 6 Unit Size Inches (mm) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4)
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1287
Home
TOC
Index

30.2-17
Master TOC
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter HMCP Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.2-8. Standard Duty Ratings Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Ampere IT. Width Rating (mm) Maximum Horsepower or (kW) 208 V 240 V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 10 15 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 200 200 10 15 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 200 200 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 380 V 1.15 SF 15 30 45 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 315 375 500 15 30 45 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 315 375 500
s HMCP/ MCCB Frame 100 100 150 150 250 250 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 1200 1200 1200 2000 150 150 150 225 250 250 400 400 600 600 600 600 800 1200 1200 1200 2000 Unit Size Inches (mm)
22 23 24 25 26
1.0 SF 18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 375 500 560 18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 375 500 560
480 V 1.15 SF 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700
1.0 SF 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 600 700 800 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 600 700 800
600 V 1.15 SF 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900
1.0 SF 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000
HMCP
37 66 105 135 135 180 180 240 304 304 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000 37 66 105 135 180 180 240 304 304 360 420 500 650 650 720 850 1000

65 110
12 (304.8) 18 (457.2)
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
200
36 (914.4)
290
54 (1371.6)
290
72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 36 (914.4)
290 65 110 200
290
72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
Standard duty ampere rating. See Table 30.2-11 below. Consult factory for width of unit. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).


Extra 50 VA Control Power 24 Vdc Control Line or Load MOV Protection Pump Control Option DeviceNet Communications Module

Starter Size 1,2,3 3,4 5 5,6 6 7 1,2,3 3,4 5 5,6 6 7
Option Unit Size 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Structure Width 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 32 (812.8) 48 (1219.2) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 24 (609.6) 32 (812.8) 48 (1219.2)
Transformer
Option ts in standard unit space. Option adds 6 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.

Option adds 6 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
CA08104001E

Technical Data IT06 Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter HMCP Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.2-12. Severe Duty Ratings Motor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1288
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

s HMCP/ MCCB Frame Unit Size Inches (mm)
Ampere IT. Width Rating (mm)
Maximum Horsepower or (kW) 208 V 240 V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150 5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150 7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200
380 V 1.15 SF 7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220 7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220
1.0 SF 11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250
480 V 1.15 SF 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450
1.0 SF 15 30 50 60 75 100 125 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 15 30 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
600 V 1.15 SF 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500
1.0 SF 20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600
HMCP
22 42 65 80 80 115 150 150 192 192 240 305 365 420 480 525 600 22 42 65 80 115 150 192 240 305 365 420 480 525 600

65 110
200
290
290
100 100 100 100 150 150 150 250 250 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 1200 150 150 225 225 400 400 400 600 800 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
12 (304.8) 18 (457.2)
36 (914.4)
54 (1371.6)
72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 36 (914.4)

65 110 200
290 290
54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
Severe duty ampere rating. See Table 30.2-15 below. Consult factory for width of unit. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.9 mm) wide (rear is unusable).



Starter Size 1,2,3 3,4 5 5,6 6 7 1,2,3 3,4 5 5,6 6 7
Option Unit Size 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Structure Width 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 32 (812.8) 48 (1219.2) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 24 (609.6) 32 (812.8) 48 (1219.2)
Option ts in standard unit space. Option adds 6 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.

Option adds 6 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1289
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.2-19
Master TOC
Table 30.2-16. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches Dimensions in Inches (mm)
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208 V 7.5 10 25 40 75 150 7.5 10 25 40 75 150 7.5 10 25 25 40 75 7.5 10 25 3 25 40 75 240 V 7.5 15 30 50 100 200 7.5 15 30 50 100 200 7.5 15 30 30 50 100 7.5 15 30 30 50 100 380 V 10 25 50 75 150 300 10 25 50 75 150 300 10 25 50 75 150 10 25 50 50 75 150 480 V 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 30 50 100 200 10 25 50 50 100 200 600 V 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 50 60 100 200 10 25 30 50 30 50 60 100 200 Switch Rating
IT. Unit Size

Inches (mm) X Space 2X 2X 4X 5X 10X 11X 12X 3X 3X 5X 5X 12X 12X 3X 3X 6X 7X 12X 3X 3X 5X 6X 6X 12X
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Fusible

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 30 60 100 200 400 600 30 60 100 200 400 600 30 60 60 100 100 200 400 30 60 60 100 60 100 100 200 400
Type T204
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 60 (1524.0) 66 (1676.4) 72 (1828.0)
Full Voltage Reversing Fusible
Type T214
18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 72 (1828.0) 72 (1828.0)
Two-Speed One Winding Fusible
Type T944
18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 36 (914.4) 42 (1066.8) 72 (1828.0)
Two-Speed Two Winding Fusible
Type T954
18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 72 (1828.0)
4 5

Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short circuit current. 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard. For top entry of motor cables. For bottom entry of motor cables. Requires 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed fuses. Add 12-inch (304.8 mm) space for low speed fuses.
CA08104001E

Technical Data Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter Fusible Switch Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.2-17. Standard Duty Ratings Fusible
Ampere IT. Width Rating (mm) Maximum Horsepower (kW) 208 V 240 V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 10 15 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 200 200 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 100 125 200 250 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 380 V 1.15 SF 15 30 45 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 315 375 500 480 V 1.15 SF 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1290
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

s Switch Rating 1.0 SF 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000 30/60 100 200 200 400 400 400 600 600 600 800 800 1200 1200 1200 1200 Unit Size Inches (mm) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 60 (1524.0)
1.0 SF 10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
1.0 SF 18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 375 500 560
1.0 SF 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 600 700 800
600 V 1.15 SF 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900
37 66 105 135 180 240 304 304 360 420 420 500 650 720 850 1000

65 110 200
290
72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
Standard duty ampere rating. See Table 30.2-19 below. Consult factory for unit width. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).

IT. Width (mm)
65 110 110 200 290 290
Starter Size 1,2,3 3 4 5,6 6 7
Option Unit Size Inches (mm) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Structure Width Inches (mm) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 32 (812.8) 36 (914.4) 64 (1625.6)

CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1291
Home
TOC
Index

30.2-21
Master TOC
Intelligent Technologies IT. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter Fusible Eatons IT. solid-state reduced voltage starter uses
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 30.2-21. Severe Duty Ratings Fusible
Ampere IT. Width Rating (mm) Maximum Horsepower (kW) 208 V 240 V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150 380 V 1.15 SF 7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220
s Switch Rating 1.0 SF 20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 30/60 30/60 100 200 200 200 400 400 400 600 600 800 800 800 1200 1200 1200 Unit Size Inches (mm) 18 (457.2)
22 23 24 25 26 27
1.0 SF 7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200
1.0 SF 11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250
480 V 1.15 SF 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450
1.0 SF 15 30 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
575 V 1.15 SF 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500
22 42 42 65 80 115 115 150 192 240 305 365 420 480 480 525 600

65
110 200
30 (762.0) 60 (1524.0)
28 29 30
290
72 (1828.8)
290
72 (1828.8)
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Severe duty ampere rating. See Table 30.2-23 below. Consult factory for width of unit. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).
Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service factor (SF).

Extra 50 VA Control Power 24 Vdc Control Line or Load MOV Protection Pump Control Option DeviceNet Communications Module
IT. Width (mm)
65 110 110 200 290 290
Transformer
Starter Size 1,2,3 3 4 5,6 6 7
Option Unit Size Inches (mm) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
Structure Width Inches (mm) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 20 (508.0) 32 (812.8) 36 (914.4) 64 (1625.6)

CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1292
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives

Maximum motor lead length is 500 feet (152 m). Drives are dual rated CT and VT with 150% Overload for 1 minute. Standard unit includes disconnect, 1% line reactor, 50 VA CPT, a 1.5% output reactor, and provisions for a control relay. Output reactor is not required if using an inverter duty motor. All Eatons Cutler-Hammer MVX units are plug-in for 20-inch (508 mm) wide structures. s Maximum motor lead length is 500 feet (152 m). s Firmly connect each drive chassis to an earthed ground. Grounding conduit does not provide adequate grounding. s Use separate conduit for output power conductors and digital and analog control signals. Within the MCC, care should be taken in routing power and control wiring.
s
Table 30.2-25. MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Maximum Horsepower Maximum Amperes CB Type HMCP MCCB 15 15 15 20 30 50 15 15 15 15 25 25 Standard Unit Space Dim. 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) X 2X 2X 2X 3X 3X 3X 2X 2X 2X 3X 3X 3X Typical Option Space Dim. 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X Maximum Option Space Dim. 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) X 4X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 4X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X
208/240 Volt Application
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0
2.5 5.0 7.0 10.0 17.0 25.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 8.2 13.0 18.0
15 15 15 30 30 50 7 7 7 15 30 30
460 Volt Application (+/- 10%)
3% line reactors are included in standard unit.
Note: 3% line reactors should be used where Power Factor Correction Capacitors are an integral part of the MCC Line Power.
Table 30.2-26. MVX Options Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Description Space Required Inches (mm) X Manual Bypass 3% Load Reactor 5% Load Reactor Oversized CPT 100 VA 1 Ampere Power Supply 12 (304.8) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 2X 1X 1X 1X 1X
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1293
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
Table 30.2-28. Plug-in Options
Plug-in Options
30.2-23
Master TOC
SVX9000 1 30 hp at 480 V Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, an ac choke, output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. All plug-in units have a built-in Dynamic Braking Circuit, M3 frame. Standard unit drives do not include a CPT.
Note: Output reactor not included on 240 V units. Standard on 380 500 V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
22

Option Boards
I/O Expander
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CT/VT Amperes Nominal hp CT/VT or (kW) CB Type
Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus Communications PROFIBUS DP Communications LonWorks Communications CANopen (Slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) Modbus (D9 Connector)
Standard Unit Space MCCB 15 15 15 15 25 40 50 70 100 125 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 50 60 80 100 Dim. 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) (X) 3X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 7X 7X 7X 3X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 4X 7X 7X 7X
Typical Options Unit Space Dim. 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) (X) 5X 5X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X 8X 8X 8X 5X 5X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X 6X 8X 8X 8X
Max. Option Unit Space Dim. 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 42 (1066.8) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) (X) 6X 6X 6X 6X 7X 7X 7X 9X 9X 9X 6X 6X 6X 6X 7X 7X 7X 7X 9X 9X 9X


HMCP 7 15 15 15 15 30 50 50 100 100 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 30 50 50 100
200 240 Volts

3.6 4.7 5.6 7 10 16 22 30 43 57 2.5 3 3.5 5 8 11 15 21 27 34 40
.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Other Options
Automatic Bypass Circuit Bypass Drive Test Switch 7 Relay 120 V Control with CPT Isolated Signal Processor 3-15 PSIG Interface Dynamic Breaking Resistors Graphics Keypad Line Fuses RFI Filter Deduct to Remove Output Filter KLC 2000 ft. (610 m) DV/DT Filter Output Contactor Dual Overloads 3 Contactor Bypass

380 500 Volts
RWT Filter

For fusible disconnect use typical option unit.
Note: Drive units t into a standard 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide MCC structure.
Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 31 for detailed information. All options will t in typical and maximum option unit. This option will t in all units. One of these options will t in 5 30 hp CT at 480 V frame standard units, 1 30 hp CT at 480 V typical and maximum option units. All options will t in maximum option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. Not available for 240 V units. RWT is mounted at the motor. See Section 35 for Reected Wave Trap (RWT).
Note: Output reactor or DV/DT lter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4 m) 30 feet (9.1 m) for 2 hp and below), or when a RWT lter is used at the motor. Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8 m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6 m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9 m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard output reactor. Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6 m) can be achieved by using the KLC DV/DT lter.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1294
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
SVX9000 30 200 hp at 480 V Non-Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. Standard units of 9X unit space must be located in the bottom of the MCC and there is no vertical bus in the lower 48 inches (1219.2 mm). There is no vertical bus for 12X units.
Note: Output reactor not included on 200 240 V units. Standard on 380 690 V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
Table 30.2-30. Non-Plug-in Options

Non Plug-in Options
Option Boards
I/O Expander Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus-RTU Communications PROFIBUS Communications LonWorks Communications CANopen (Slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) Modbus (D9 Connector)

CT Nominal Amperes hp or CT (kW) VT Nominal Amperes hp or VT (kW) CB Type
Standard Unit Space (X) 9X 9X 9X 12X
Drive Option Space Dim. 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) (X) 12X 12X 12X 12X


HMCP MCCB Dim. 100 100 100 150 125 175 200 150 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8)
200 240 Volts

70 83 113 139 165 200 52 65 77 96 125 160 180 260

25 30 40 50 60 75 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200
70 83 113 139 165 200 264 52 65 77 96 125 160 180 250 320
25 30 40 50 60 75 100 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250
Other Options
Automatic Bypass Circuit Bypass Drive Test Switch 7 Relay 120 V Control with CPT Isolated Signal Processor 3-15 PSIG Interface Dynamic Breaking Resistors Graphics Keypad Line Fuses RFI Filter Deduct to Remove Output Filter KLC 1000 ft. (305 m) DV/DT Filter Output Contactor Dual Overloads 3 Contactor Bypass Dynamic Breaking Circuit

100 100 100 150 150 250 400 400 400

125 150 175 225 300 400 500 600 700
72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 9X 9X 9X 9X 12X 12X 12X 12X 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
380 500 Volts, 50/60 Hz
72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X
Drives with Fusible disconnects require drive with option space. 28-inch (711.2 mm) wide, 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel. 32-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel. 40-inch wide (1016.0 mm), 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.
RWT Filter

Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 31 for detailed information. This option will t in all units. All options will t in option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. Not available for 240 V units. RWT is mounted at the motor.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1295
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
Table 30.2-32. Multi-Structure Options
Plug-in Options
30.2-25
Master TOC
SVX9000 200 1100 hp at 480 V Multi-Structure Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons Cutler-Hammer standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, and a door-mounted keypad. Disconnect and drive unit are in separate structures, structures are mechanically interlocked. Structures have no vertical bus. These drives are bottom exit only. CT: Constant Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute. VT: Variable Torque drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute. Table 30.2-31. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CT Nominal Amperes hp or CT (kW) VT Nominal CB Amperes hp or VT Type (kW) Standard Unit Space (X) Drive Option Space Dim. (X) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
22

Option Boards
I/O Expander
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus Communications PROFIBUS DP Communications LonWorks Communications CANopen (Slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) Modbus (D9 Connector)
HMCP MCCB Dim.


380 550 Volts

320 400 480 600 700 880 1020 1070 1200 1300

250 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
400 460 600 672 880 1020 1070 1200
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
400 600 600 1200 1200 1200 1200 1600 1600 1600
800 800 1200 1600 1600 2000 2000 2000 2500 2500
72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
Other Options
Automatic Bypass Circuit Bypass Drive Test Switch 7 Relay 120 V Control with CPT Isolated Signal Processor 3-15 PSIG Interface Dynamic Breaking Resistors Graphics Keypad Line Fuses RFI Filter Deduct to Remove Output Filter KLC 2000 ft. (610 m) DV/DT Filter Output Contactor 3 Contactor Bypass Dynamic Breaking Circuit

72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X
Drives with fusible disconnects require drive with option space. 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. 80-inch (2032.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure. 68-inch (1727.2 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 48-inch (1219.2 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. Contact factory for sizing. 100-inch (2540.0 mm) wide unit. 80-inch (2032.0 mm) drive is in (2) 40-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structures, disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. 116-inch (2946.4 mm) wide unit. 96-inch (2438.4 mm) drive is in (2) 48-inch (1219.2 mm) wide structures, disconnect is in a 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
RWT Filter

Up to 5 Option Boards may be selected. Please see Section 31 for detailed information. This option will t in all units. All options will t in Option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. DV/DT lter not available 700 hp and above. Consult factory for sizing and availability. RWT is mounted at the motor. See Section 35 for Reected Wave Trap (RWT).
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1296
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Option Groups for ac Combination Starters, ac Drives

Option Group A
Table 30.2-33. Wiring Class
Description NEMA Class IA NEMA Class IC NEMA Class IIB NEMA Class IIC NEMA Class IS (Includes 1B wiring and 2B schematics)
Table 30.2-39. Internal Circuit Breaker Options

Description Alarm Contact Auxiliary 1NO 1NC Auxiliary 2NO 2NC 120 Volts Shunt Trip 50C (Thermal Magnetic)
Table 30.2-40. Terminal Blocks

Description Side Mounted
Control Terminal Blocks and Device Panels not included with NEMA 1A wiring.
Table 30.2-34. 100 kA Circuit Breaker Starter Interrupting Capacity

Starter Type Starters with HMCPs Starters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers Starters with HMCPs Starters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Table 30.2-41. Control Wire Options

Description #16 AWG (standard) #14 AWG Wire Markers Spade Wire Terminals Ring Wire Terminals Wiring to Common CPT SIS Power Wire Substitution SIS Control Wire Substitution Starter Class 2 Interwiring/Per Wire
Voltage 480 480 600 600
Current Limiter Attachments are used. Add 6 inches (152.4 mm) to all size 3 and 4 starters.
Table 30.2-35. Control Circuit Transformers Typical Sizing

Starter Size 1, 2 (100 VA) Includes extra 50 VA 3, 4 (150 VA) Includes extra 50 VA 5, 6 (250 VA) Includes extra 50 VA Extra 50 VA, Size 1, 2 Extra 100 VA, Size 3, 4 Extra 150 VA, Size 5, 6
Freedom Starter control terminals only available with spade wire terminals.
Table 30.2-42. Miscellaneous Options

Description Mini Ammeter and CT Mini Voltmeter Mini Elapsed Time Meter Panel Elapsed Time Meter Operations Counter Wiring Diagram on Door Coil Surge Suppressor CT for Remote Metering (Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space) Device Labels Blank Device Panels

Refer to Table 30.2-78 for actual ratings.
Note: Price includes 1 secondary and 2 primary fuses.
Table 30.2-36. Control Circuit Fusing

Description Control Fuse and Auxiliary Switch Control Fuse Blown Fuse Indicator
Note: Required in accordance with NEC for all starter units with control wiring external to the MCC. See NEC, General for exceptions.
May add 6 inches (152.4 mm) to unit size. Consult factory. May add 6 inches (152.4 mm). Consult factory.
Table 30.2-43. Vacuum Contactors in Lieu of Air Break

Starter Type FVNR FVR, 2S2W, PW RVAT, 2S1W, YD-Open YD-Closed Available Sizes 4 6
Table 30.2-37. Motor Starter Auxiliary Contacts

Description 1NO or 1NC (Sizes 1 4) 1NO or 1NC (Sizes 5 6)
Maximum of eight on each contactor Maximum of four on each contactor
Maximum of 4 per contactor on multi-contactor starters and 6-inch (152.4 mm) units.
Table 30.2-44. Ground Fault Protection Instantaneous or Adjustable

Description Earth Leakage Breakers Sizes 1 4 Earth Leakage Breakers Size 5 D64 Relay, with Zero Sequence CT All require additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space
Table 30.2-38. Interlock for Switch or Breaker Operator

Description 1NO 1NC 2NO 2NC
Note: For use when control circuit is fed from an external source.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1297
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data Option Group C
Devices may require extra unit space. Table 30.2-51. Monitoring Relays
Type of Relay D60LA Current Sensing Voltage Transducer ac Current Sensors with CTs ac Current Transducer, 4 20 mA, Self-powered with CTs Price Includes 1 PT 0 5 Thru 0 100 A 0 50 Thru 0 300 A 0 300 Thru 0 600 A All Ratings
30.2-27
Master TOC
Table 30.2-45. Power Fuses R, J Type

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
22 23
Additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space required
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Table 30.2-46. Power Factor Capacitor Options

Description Blown Power Fuse Indicator (Set of 3-1 Per Phase)
Phase Monitoring Relay 3-Phase Watt Transducer, 4 20 mA, Self-powered CTs

Table 30.2-47. Current Limiter Attachment for HMCP

Description Size 1-2 Size 3 Size 4 Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space Requires additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space
Loop powered devices requires 24 Vdc power source which is typically provided in the PLC. Does not require separate 24 Vdc power source. Suitable for powering analog meters.
Option Group B
Devices may require extra unit space. Table 30.2-48. Timing Relays
Type of Relay Solid-State Timer Pneumatic AGASTAT 24 Hour Motor Timer 7 Day Timer Repeat Cycle Timer Mounting Panel Panel On or Off Delay Panel Panel Door or Panel
Table 30.2-49. Control Relays

Number of Poles 2-Pole 4-Pole 2-Pole 4-Pole 6-Pole 8-Pole 10-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 6-Pole 8-Pole
Type General Purpose Type D7 Socket Relay N300 Fixed Contacts Type AR Machine Tool Relays N600 Convertible Contacts
Type M D26 Relays N600 Convertible Contacts
36 37 38
The 6- and 8-pole units can be provided with 4 additional nonconvertible NO contacts.
Table 30.2-50. Alternators

Description 2-Circuit Alternator 3-Circuit Alternator Panel (Additional 6-inch (152.4 mm) space required on size 1s and size 2s)
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Technical Data Option Group E
Device Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb

Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1298
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Option Group F
Options for 6-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Units

Control terminal blocks are 300 volt rated and are limited to 12 points maximum. s Standard VA control transformer only.
s
Device Type 10250T

Device Pushbuttons 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit Selector Switches 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position Key Operated Adder Pilot Lights Standard Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Standard Transformer LED Bulb Push to Test Transformer 6 Volt Bulb Push to Test LED Bulb
Device Type E22
E30
On 6-inch (152.4 mm) starter units, pilot devices are limited to (3) E22 devices.
Maximum 2 devices per starter in dual units. Maximum of 6 devices without increasing compartment space.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1299
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
Table 30.2-55. Main-Tie-Main Auto-Throw Over Options
Option AT200 Description
30.2-29
Master TOC
Table 30.2-54. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers Dimensions in Inches (mm) Frames reect standard circuit breakers. Unit spacings shown include sufcient space to terminate cables on any standard breaker lug. If cable sizes exceed those listed, add 12-inch (304.8 mm) space for lug adapters.
Frame Circuit Size Breaker (Amperes) Frame Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Main Unit Size Feeder Unit Size X Inches Space (mm) 2X 3X 3X 4X 5X 5X 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 4X 30 (762.0) X Space 2X 3X 3X 3X 4X 5X 5X 4X 7X 12X 7X 12X 12X 750 kcmil (6 per Phase) 750 kcmil (3 per Phase) 750 kcmil (3 per Phase) Maximum Cable Size
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
240 V 480 V 575 V Inches (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 65 100 100 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 25 35 35 35 35 35 25 50 25 50 35 50 35 50 50 35 50 35 50 35 50 50 65 50 65 50 65

125 150 225 250 400
E125H FDC J250 FDC J250 JDC HKD KDC CHKD CKDC
12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
4/0 (1 per Phase) 4/0 (1 per Phase) 4/0 (1 per Phase) 350 kcmil (1 per Phase) 250 kcmil (2 per Phase) or 500 kcmil (1 per Phase) 500 kcmil (2 per Phase) AT300 AT300X
Standard PLC-based control scheme. No operator interface (PanelMate) provided. Sequence of operations and external controls are pre-dened and not subject to customer modications. Type of voltage sensing device must be chosen. If closed-transition operation is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used. Same as AT200, except includes operator interface (PanelMate). Same as AT200, except customer modications are acceptable. This is the proper choice for PLC-based systems with special sequences, more than main-tie-main congurations, and/or where special PanelMate page layouts are required. Standard IQ Transfer-based control scheme for main-main congurations. Either or both sources may be generators. Includes manual-auto operation, and generator control switch. If closed-transition operation is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
AT300IQ
600
HLD LDC CHLD CLDC
24 (609.6) 42 (1066.8) 72 (1828.8) 42 (1066.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
800
NDC CHND CNDC
42 (1066.8)
7X
72 (1828.8) 12X 42 (1066.8) 7X
Panelmate page layouts are pre-dened, and not subject to customer modications.
1200
HND NDC
CHND 100 CNDC 100 2000 RD RDC CRD CRDC RD RDC 100 100 100 100 100 100
72 (1828.8) 12X 72 (1828.8) 12X
2500

72 (1828.8) 12X
72 (1828.8)
12X
750 kcmil (6 per Phase)
See circuit breaker terminal data for variations. 100% Rated when 90 cable is applied at 75C ampacity for 100% rating. Digitrip 310 LS is required and included in the price. Add 6-inch (152.4 mm) for top entry of incoming cables. Install at top or cable top entry or at bottom for bottom cable entry. NEMA 1 gasketed only. Digitrip 310 LS is standard and included in the pricing. The main breaker requires the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable. 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Table 30.2-56. Main Circuit Breakers Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers Manually or Electrically Operated Fixed Mounted Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size Amperes 800 Circuit Breaker Type MDS-608 MDS-C08 MDS-616 MDS-C16 MDS-620 MDS-C20 MDS-632 MDS-C32 240 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Unit Size 480 V 575 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 42 (1066.8) Enclosure Width Enclosure Depth 36 (914.4)
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1300
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6)
1600 2000 3200
Note: A 4-inch (101.6 mm) ller section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
Table 30.2-57. Main Circuit Breakers Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated Drawout Mounted Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size (Amperes) 800 1600 2000 3200

Circuit Breaker Type MDS-608 MDS-C08 MDS-616 MDS-C16 MDS-620 MDS-C20 MDS-632 MDS-C32
240 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Unit Size 480 V 575 V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100
Enclosure Width
Enclosure Depth 42 (1066.8)
72 (1828.8) 24 (609.6)
A 4-inch (101.6 mm) ller section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening. Structure is rear aligned.
Table 30.2-58. Digitrip Units

Type RMS 310 1150 Refer to Section 2 for more details. Unit Space Inches (mm) 72 (1828.8) or 12X
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Options
Tie Breaker Electrically Operated
Accessories
UV Release-Instantaneous Shunt Trip (standard on electrically operated breakers) Key Interlock on breaker Auxiliary Switch (3A/3B) Cell Position Switch Operations Counter Auxiliary Power Module (to test Digitrip) Portable Lift Truck Manual Close Pushbutton Cover
Tie breaker adds an additional 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide bus transition section. Also (2) 4-inch (101.6 mm) ller sections will be added to the MCC if the tie breaker is located in the center of the MCC lineup. If the tie breaker is located between the two main structures the (2) 4-inch (101.6 mm) llers are not needed.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1301
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.2-31
Master TOC
Table 30.2-59. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3-Pole 250 or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
Switch Rating Amperes 30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual 60/60 Dual 100 200 400 600 800 1200

Fuse Clip Size Amperes 30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual 60/60 Dual 100 200 400 600 800 1200
Unit Space Incoming Line Feeder Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 54 (1371.8) 48 (1219.2) 60 (1524.0) 3X 3X 3X 5X 8X 9X 8X 10X 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 42 (1066.8) 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 3X 5X 7X
Table 30.2-62. Lighting Panelboard Circuit Breakers Eatons Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers can be either plug-in or bolt-on, 1-, 2- or 3-pole through 240 V. 600 V maximum 1-, 2- or 3-pole circuit breakers are bolt-on.
Poles Maximum Voltage 240 240 600 600 Plug-in Bolt-on Ampere Interrupting Capacity 10,000 22,000 14,000 65,000
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1/2/3 1/2/3 1/2/3 1/2/3
HQP QPHW
BAB QBHW EHD HFD
Table 30.2-63. Automatic Transfer Switches Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere Switch Rating Type 100 150 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000 1000 1200 1600 2000 100 150 260 400 600 800 1000 1200
48 (1219.2) 8X 48 (1219.2) 8X 60 (1524.0) 10X
Interrupting Unit Rating (kA) Width 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 65 65 65 35 35 50 50 100 24 (609.6)
Unit Space 36 (914.4) or 6X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 72 (1828.8) or 12X 72 (1828.8) or 12X
Cutler-Hammer MTVX, NTVS Cutler-Hammer MTVX, NTVS Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVI Cutler-Hammer ATVISP Cutler-Hammer ATVISP Cutler-Hammer ATVISP Cutler-Hammer ATVISP ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000
20 (508.0)
Suitable for 100,000 ampere interrupting if Class RK fuses are used. Type of SW K-SW 30 800 amperes. For bottom cable entry, add 6 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space. For bottom entry, add 12 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space. For top entry, add 6 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space. High magnetic molded case switch.
Table 30.2-60. Lighting Panelboards 120/240 V or 120/208 V Lighting Panelboards Type PL1A Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire; 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire.
Number of Circuits Chassis Rating (Amperes) Unit Space Inches (mm) 3-Phase 4-Wire 24 (609.6) or 4X 30 (762.0) or 5X 36 (914.4) or 6X
44 (1117.6) 72 (1828.8) or 12X
31
20 (508.0)

1-Phase 3-Phase 1-Phase 3-Wire 4-Wire 3-Wire 18 30 42 225 225 225 100 100 225 24 (609.6) or 4X 30 (762.0) or 5X 36 (914.4) or 6X
72 (1828.8) or 12X
28 (711.2) 36 (914.4) 40 (1016.0)
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Bolt-on 1-, 2-, 3-pole breakers only.
Table 30.2-61. 277/480 V or 480/600 V Lighting Panelboards Type PRL3A Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 480 or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire or 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire. Mounted in bottom portion of structure.
Number of Circuits Chassis Rating (Amperes) 100 250 100 250 100 250 100 250 400/600 400/600 400/600 400/600 Unit Space Inches (mm) 3-Phase 3-Wire 36 (914.4) or 6X 36 (914.4) or 6X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 36 (914.4) or 6X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 3-Phase 4-Wire 36 (914.4) or 6X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 48 (1219.2) or 8X 60 (1524.0) or 10X 72 (1828.8) or 12X

14 18 24 26 32 36 42 42 12 14 30 42
ATVI designs include IQ Transfer door mounted microprocessor-based monitoring device for use in open transition transfer switches where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situations is essential. The IQ Transfer is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be used with Cutler-Hammer transfer switches. This device provides the operator with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the power source currently in use. The IQ Transfer continuously monitors either single-phase or 3-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the Load. Depending on the application, the user can customize the IQ Transfer to meet specic application need. Manually operated switch: MTVX = Single handle manual operation. NTVS = Electrically operated non-automatic. Requires 42-inch (1066.8 mm) deep structure.
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Either plug-in or bolt-on 1-, 2-, 3-pole breakers only.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Table 30.2-64. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers s Transformer 1.0 2.0 kVA will include a circuit breaker and fuses in a standard 2X unit. s Transformers 3.0 kVA and above have taps and electrostatic shields as standard. s Transformers 3.0 kVA and above will include the primary and secondary circuit breakers housed behind a single door.
kVA Rating Unit Space Primary Breaker (included in space factor) 230 V 480 V 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 30 40 60 70 80 125 15 25 40 50 70 Secondary Breaker (included in space factor)
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1302
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.2-66. Current Limiting Reactors Dimensions in Inches (mm) Structures contain three single-phase 60 Hz reactors which limit available short circuit current from 100,000 rms amperes to 14,000 rms amperes. Reactors available with ohmic values of .01, .015, .02 and .025.
Amperes Unit Space Inches (mm) 600 800 1000 1200 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) X Space 12X 12X 12X 12X 21 D x 20 W (533.4 D x 508.0 W) 21 D x 20 W (533.4 D x 508.0 W) 26 D x 28 W (660.4 D x 711.2 W) 26 D x 28 W (660.4 D x 711.2 W) Mounting
Single-Phase
.5 .75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 45 9 15 25 30 45
2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 4X 4X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 6X 7X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 25 40 50 60 70 100 15 20 40 40 60
20 30 40 60 90 125 150 175 250 40 60 90 125 175
Table 30.2-67. TVSS (Clipper Power System) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect Includes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C contact, alarm enable and disable, and circuit breaker disconnect.
Description Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space
Surge Current Per Phase

100 kA 120 kA 160 kA 200 kA 250 kA 300 kA 400 kA 500 kA
Three-Phase
18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) CPS-250 (Recommended Service Entrance) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) CPS-300 18 (457.2) CPS-400 18 (457.2) CPS-500
CPS-100 CPS-120 (Recommended Branch Unit) CPS-160 CPS-200
3X 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X
Also available in 12-inch (304.8 mm) unit (2X) without circuit breaker disconnect.
Note: Specify 3-phase Delta or 3-phase Wye.
Transformers feeding an MCC mounted panelboard require a secondary breaker or main breaker in panelboard.
Table 30.2-65. Power Factor Correction Capacitors PF capacitors are electrolytic type and are optionally available with external line fuses and blown fuse indicators. Capacitors sizes must be specied by the customer. Caution: Capacitors on the main bus of the MCC may affect solid-state equipment. Please consult factory.
kvar Rating 208 V Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space 240 V Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space 600 V Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space
Table 30.2-68. DeviceNet Communications DeviceNet-enabled components in MCCs eliminate up to 90% of the control wiring versus traditional hardwired designs. 24 Vdc DeviceNet is prewired throughout the MCC. Trunk cable is provided in the horizontal wireway. Drop cable is provided for vertical wireways and units.
Part Number Description D77D-DNA D77D-EMA D77D-EMA MVXDN OPTC7 DN50, DN65 PS1 PS2 PanelMate 1700 DN50
Space Requirements In Power Supply Buckets In Power Supply Buckets
QCPort Interface to DeviceNet Modbus TCP Communications Modbus RTU485
2 3 4 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 25 30 40 50 60 75 90 100 120
12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X
12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 12 (304.8) 2X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X 24 (609.6) 4X 36 (914.4) 6X 36 (914.4) 6X
MVX Adjustable Frequency Drives DeviceNet Interface SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives DeviceNet Interface Discrete DeviceNet Interface for IT. Solid-State Starters Single 5 ampere Power Supply 2X Dual 5 ampere Power Supply Operator interface for DeviceNet System DeviceNet I/O module 2X 12-inch (304.8 mm)/2X 12-inch (304.8 mm)/ 2X Minimum
IT. starters up to 66 amperes require additional 6 inches (152.4 mm) when selecting DN50, DN65 DeviceNet interfaces.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1303
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
Table 30.2-71. Incoming Line Metering and Bus Protection
Type Description
30.2-33
Master TOC
Earth Leakage Breakers

Earth Leakage Breakers offer Class 1 ground fault protection down to the 30 mA level. Ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from .03 to 30 amperes in eight steps. s Ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds in six steps.
s
Unit Space Inches (mm) 12 (304.8) or 2X
22 23 24
Switchboard Ammeter Meters Ammeter with Switch 1% Accuracy Voltmeter Voltmeter with Switch AM/VM AM/VM with Switches Instrument 600/800 A CT Transformers 1000 A CT 2000 A CT 2500 A CT 480/120 PT Signal Transducers Current (Add CT) 1-Phase Voltage (Add PT) Watt (Add CT and PT) 1-Phase
Standard Features
Built-in push-to-trip for functional testing. s Tripped window indicates red for ground fault trip. s Alarm contact for remote indication of trip.
s
Consult Eaton
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.2-69. Earth Leakage Breakers

Frame F J K
6 (152.4) or 1X 6 (152.4) or 1X
HMCP or Thermal-Magnetic Yes Yes Yes
Additional Space Required 1X 1X 1X
Voltage Protection
TVSS (See Table 30.2-67) Ground Detection Lights 3-Phase Underground Systems System Voltage Monitor Lightning Arrester and Surge Capacitor Current Voltage

18 (457.2) or 3X 6 (152.4) or 1X
Six-inch (152.4 mm) not required for NEMA size 6 starters.
Table 30.2-70. Electronic Metering Specications

Description Volts Current Power Power Factor Frequency THD Demand Values Trend Analysis Programmable Output Relays Programmable Analog Outputs Contact Inputs Analog Inputs Display Type IQ 320 L-L, L-N A, B, C Watt, var, VA Apparent, Displacement Hertz All
IQ DP-4130 L-L, L-N A, B, C Watt, var, VA Apparent, Displacement Hertz Amperes, Volts All (3) 10 A Form C (1) kW Demand 7 Segment LED Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
IQ Analyzer 6400 and 6600 L-L, L-N A, B, C, N, G Watt, var, VA Apparent, Displacement Hertz Amperes, Volts All Time, Date
Ground Fault Sensing C-HRG Safe Ground High Resistance Ground System
Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure without a vertical wireway. 72 (1828.8) or 12X
Two electronic meters will t in a single 12-inch (304.8 mm) (2X) unit. 3-phase/3-wire systems require 2 CTs. 3-phase/4-wire systems require 3 CTs. Ammeters require 2 CTs for 3-phase/3-wire systems, and 3 CTs for 3-phase/4-wire systems. Voltmeters require 2 PTs for 3-phase/3-wire systems, and 3-PTs for 3-phase/4-wire systems. Without disconnect 12 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X.
Harmonic Correction
Table 30.2-72. Clean Control Center Eatons Cutler-Hammer Clean Control Center is an integrated power correction system that provides harmonic correction directly on the MCC Horizontal Bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and dynamically injects into the Horizontal Bus a synthesized waveform which cancels harmonic content from non-linear loads such as ac drives. The result is a clean waveform. Clean Control Centers are UL 845 listed.
Harmonic Current (Amperes) Input Disconnect Voltage Type Standard Unit Space Inches (mm) Standard Unit Space (X)
Reverse Mode LCD with LED Backlight Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
(4) 10 A Form C (3) 0-10/4-20 mA (3) + 30 Vdc Differential (1) 0-20/4-20 mA Graphic LCD with LED Backlight Cutler-Hammer PowerNet
Communications
Requires 12-inch (2X) unit space. For Power Xpert meter, contact Eaton. At computer only. Up to 24 data values may be used for Trend Analysis with Time, Date Stamp. Communications to Modbus, Ethernet available via optional Communication Modules.
Up to 50 A Active Harmonic Filter 480 V Up to 100 A Active Harmonic Filter 480 V
Molded 72 H x 20 W 12X Case Switch (1828.8 H x 508.0 W) Molded 72 H x 20 W 12X Case Switch (1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
Clean Control Center model includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCE structure, current transformers and door-mounted digital interface panel. Multiple units can be applied in parallel for additional harmonic correction.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1304
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic Control Typical Layout

Source Side Harmonics Attenuated Load Side Harmonics Present
Main Breaker Panelboard Harmonic Correction Unit 100 A SVX9000 ac Drive (30 hp) SVX9000 ac Drive (150 hp) SVX9000 ac Drive (250 hp) Starter
TVSS Protection Module
Distribution Transformer
Starter SVX9000 ac Drive (30 hp)
Starter
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
28.00 (711.2)
20.00 (508.0)
Figure 30.2-4. Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic Control Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: As seen by the upstream electrical system compliance to the most stringent standards of IEEE 519 is assured.
The layout above is a typical arrangement for Eatons CutlerHammer Clean Control Center including harmonic correction units for non-linear loads such as ac Variable Frequency Drives. The horizontal bus of the Clean Control Center is virtually free of harmonic current content at the point where the Harmonic Correction Unit connects to the bus. From this point to the connection at the utility bus, the Clean Control Center complies with the most stringent requirements of IEEE 519 and provides a clean
waveform to the upstream distribution system. Harmonic Correction may be applied to loads fed directly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted ac drives) or loads fed indirectly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted circuit breakers feeding remote drives). Multiple correction units may be used to achieve the level of harmonic correction as required by the amount of non-linear loads within the MCC lineup.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1305
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
30.2-35
Master TOC
Standard Structures and Structure Options

Eatons standard IT. Series MCC structure is NEMA 1 gasketed, 90-inch (2286.0 mm) high, 20-inch (508.0 mm) wide with a depth as shown in Figure 30.2-5. Each standard structure has a 9-inch (228.6 mm) high horizontal wireway at the top and at the bottom and a 4-inch (101.6 mm) wide full height vertical wireway at the right.
Description
All wireway doors are hinged and secured with 1/4-turn latches. The standard busing is 600 A, UL rated, copper horizontal bus and 300 A, UL rated, copper vertical bus braced for 65,000 symmetrical amperes. Many other bus sizes and types are available. Also included as standard is a vertical bus isolation barrier.
16 (406.4)
22 23
90 286.0) (22
24 25 26
Table 30.2-73. Standard Structures and Structure Options Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Standard Structures
16 (406.4) deep structure 21 (533.4) deep structure Front mounting only Front and rear mounting 4 (101.6) of additional structure width, 40 (1016.0) maximum 8 (203.2) vertical wireway in lieu of standard 4-inch (101.6) Structure 1 Structure 2 Structure 3 Structure 4
20 (508.0)
27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Special Structures
Single corner section for L conguration of MCC Transition section Series 2100 to Type W 10 (254.0) wide front aligned Plug-in blank relay mounting space, per 6-inch Fixed-mounted relay back pan, full depth of structure 20 (508.0) structure with wireway, 13 (330.2) with usable panel 24 (609.6) structure with wireway, 17 (431.8) with usable panel 28 (711.2) structure with wireway, 21 (533.4) with usable panel 20 (508.0) structure without wireway, 17 (431.8) with usable panel 24 (609.6) structure without wireway, 21 (533.4) with usable panel 28 (711.2) structure without wireway, 25 (635.0) with usable panel 32 (812.8) with double door 36 (914.4) with double door 40 (1016.0) with double door Programmable controller mounting structure (per complete structure with full xed mounting back pan) 20 (508.0) structure with wireway 24 (609.6) structure with wireway 28 (711.2) structure with wireway 20 (508.0) structure without wireway 24 (609.6) structure without wireway 28 (711.2) structure without wireway Plexiglass see-through door insert for PLC structure 19 (482.6) instrumentation mounting racks installed in PLC structure
21 (533.4)
Any 6 (152.4) height
Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section 6 (152.4) increments Consult Eaton
20 (508.0)
34 35 36
Table 30.2-74. Structure Modications Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Channel oor sills: 11-gauge, 1 x 3 (25.4 x 76.2) NEMA 1 gasket NEMA 12 dust-proof, includes bottom plate Bottom plate for NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure 150-watt space heater, per structure Thermostat for space heater control Pullbox kit for cable and wiring to be eld mounted on top structure 12 (304.8) high 18 (457.2) high 24 (609.6) high Rear hinged structure door, 72 (1828.8) high NEMA 2 drip shield on top of MCC NEMA 3R non-walk-in Front-mounted Back-to-back NEMA 3R walk-in aisle-front mounted NEMA 3R walk-in tunnel type NEMA 4X consult factory Special reduced height structures Seismic certication (earthquake qualication) UL handle extension
21 (533.4)
Top Horizontal Wireway Vertical Wireway
37 38 39
Vertical Compartment
40
Bottom Horizontal Wireway 20 (508.0)
41 42 43
The standard IT. structure is designed to comply with the UL 2-meter requirement. Disconnect operating handle is not more than 2 meters [78 inches (1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the MCC. Motor Control Centers elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. UL handle extension optionally available when required.
Structure 3 72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space Front 66-inch (1676.4 mm) Space Rear Back-to-Back
Figure 30.2-5. Structures Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Table 30.2-75. Bus Modications Dimensions in Inches (mm) Eatons IT. MCCs bear the UL label. Service entrance labeling is available.
Description Main Bus, Per Vertical Structure Copper Horizontal Bus Ratings Tin-Plated
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1306
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
50C
65C
Cu Tin-Plated (Standard) 21 (533.4) Deep 21 (533.4) Deep 21 (533.4) Deep 21 (533.4) Deep Optional Optional Standard Cu Only Standard Cu Only Cu Only Optional Standard Optional Standard Optional Freedom Standard Cu Standard Cu Cu Cu
600 Ampere Size .25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) Bars/Phase 1 .25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) Bars/Phase 1 800 Ampere Size .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 1 .25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8) Bars/Phase 1 .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 1 1200 Ampere Size .25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) Bars/Phase 2 1600 Ampere Size .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 4 .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 2 2000 Ampere Size .25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) Bars/Phase 6 .25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5) Bars/Phase 4 2500 Ampere Size .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 8 .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 6 3200 Ampere Size N/A .25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2) Bars/Phase 8 Silver-Plated Bus Insulated main horizontal bus, per vertical structure (taping) Vertical bus, per vertical structure: 300 A copper (tin-plated) Increased bus capacity: Rated at 600 A (Front mounted only) Rated at 600 A (Back-to-back) copper Rated at 800 A (Back-to-back and front) Rated at 1200 A Increased mechanical bus bracing, per vertical structure: 42,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current 65,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current 100,000 A rms symmetrical short circuit current Vertical Bus isolation barrier, per vertical structure Labyrinth design insulation-isolation vertical bus barrier Ground bus, 300 A standard, per vertical structure Increased capacity ground bus only, 600 A, 1/4- x 2-inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm), per vertical structure Plug-in Grounding System, includes 300 A vertical ground bus and unit grounding clips, per vertical structure Neutral bus, ungrounded for 3-phase, 4-wire power, per vertical structure Splice plates

Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Requires 21-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Not available in back-to-back structure. Contact Eaton for 3200 ampere dimensions. Vertical bus and unit stabs are tin-plated copper only. Neutral is half-rating of horizontal bus.
Table 30.2-76. Main Lugs Only Mechanical Lug Compartment (3-Phase, 3- or 4-wire) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Provisions for terminating incoming line cables directly onto the MCC bus system. Up to 1200 amperes, all lug landings are bolted to a fully rated vertical bus in that section. MLO sections must be put at the top for top entry cables and at the bottom for bottom entry cables. For smaller cable sizes, cable lugs may also be extended into an optional top hat as shown in this table.
Maximum Bus Maximum Cable Entry Cable Size Rating Cables (Top or (kcmil) (Amperes) per Phase Bottom) 350 600 2 4 Top Bottom 18-inch (457.2 mm) Top Hat 600 800 2 4 18-inch (457.2 mm) Top Hat 750 1000 2 4 2 8 Lug Type Screw Crimp Screw Screw Crimp Either Unit Space 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4)
Bus Duct Entry Sandwich Type to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect Pull Box
Pull box and pre-fabricated bus connectors are supplied to match the sandwich type bus duct end ange. Bus duct is assumed to enter the top. Bus duct type and orientation to the MCC must be provided. Table 30.2-77. Bus Duct Entry to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect Pull Box Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Horizontal Bus Rating (Amperes) 600 1600 2000 2500
X Space
Enclosure Width
2X 3X 3X 4X 6X
Pull Box Height 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6)
Contact Eaton for 3200 ampere dimensions.
39 40 41 42 43

Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Either
18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4)
3X 4X 4X 6X
Note: Consult factory for non-segregated bus requirements.
20 (508.0)
Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp
1000 1000
1200 2500 3200
24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8)
4X 6X 12X 12X 5X 6X 12X 12X 12X 12X
6-inch (152.4 mm) = (1X) unit space. Lug landings require the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1307
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data
Table 30.2-79. Typical Heat Loss Data
Inrush Current 3.8 6.1 7.0 7.0 7.8 3.3 3.3 7.6 10.8 11.6 11.6 15.6 3.8 10 10 Description Vertical Sections Horizontal Bus and Ampacity Current (A) 600 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3200 Loss (W) 200 300 500 700 1000 1400 2050 500 30 50 90 110 210
30.2-37
Master TOC
Table 30.2-78. Control Power Requirements

NEMA Size Continuous Current .28 .34 .37 .37 .67 .28 .28 .54 .66 .70 .70 1.00 .28 .72 1.12
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
FVNR, 252W, FVR

Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7
Space Heaters (Each) FVNR Size 1 FVNR Size 2 FVNR Size 3 FVNR Size 4 FVNR Size 5
2S1W
Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5
SSRV
24 A 33 304 A 360 850 A
Table 30.2-80. Typical Weights in lbs. (kg)

16-Inch (406.4 mm) Deep x 20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Structure 21-Inch (533.4 mm) Deep x 20-Inch (508.0 mm) Wide Structure 205 (93) 265 (120)
Adder for Horizontal Bus

800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A 10 (5) 15 (7) 18 (8) 24 (11) 30 (14) 38 (17) 49 (22)
30 31 32 33
Adder for Vertical Bus

600 A 800 A 1200 A 30 (14) 40 (18) 60 (27)
Adder for Units IT. Inches (mm)

6.00 (152.4) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4)
10 (5) 20 (9) 37 (17) 50 (23) 83 (38) 102 (46)
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Weight for NEMA 1 structure with 600 ampere horizontal, 300 ampere vertical and dc power bus.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1308
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor Protection
In line with 2005 NEC 430.6(A), circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selections are based on full load currents for induction motors running at speeds normal for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics using data taken from NEC Table 130.250 (3-phase). Actual motor nameplate ratings shall be used for selecting motor running overload protection. Motors built special for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and applications will require other considerations as dened in the application section of the NEC. These additional considerations may require the use of a higher rated HMCP, or at least one with higher magnetic pickup settings. Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based on known characteristics of Eatons Cutler-Hammer type breakers, specic units are recommended. The current ratings are no more than the maximum limits set by the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters. Motors with lower code letters will require further considerations. In general, these selections were based on: 1. Ambient Outside enclosure not more than 40C (104F). 2. Motor starting Infrequent starting, stopping or reversing. 3. Motor accelerating time 10 seconds or less. 4. Locked rotor Maximum 6 times motor FLA. Type HMCP motor circuit protector may not set at more than 1300% of the motor full-load current, to comply with NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA Design B high efciency motors which can be set up to 1700%.) Circuit breaker selections are based on types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types may be required to satisfy specic system application requirements. For motor full load currents of 208 and 200 volts, increase the corresponding 230-volt motor values by 10 and 15% respectively.
Table 30.2-81. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Horsepower Full Load Fuse Size NEC 430.52 Amperes Maximum (NEC) FLA Amperes Recommended Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breaker Motor Circuit Protector Type HMCP Type Amperes Adj. Range E125 E125 E125 E125 7 15 15 30 21 77 45 165 45 165 90 330 90 330 150 550 150 550 300 1100 300 1100 500 1500 500 1500 750 1500 875 1750 1250 2500 2000 4000 2000 4000 1800 6000 1800 6000 1800 6000 9 33 21 77 21 77 45 165 45 165 90 330 90 330 150 550 150 550 210 770 300 1100 300 1100 500 1500 750 1500 875 1750 1000 2000 2000 4000 2000 4000 1800 6000 9 30 21 70 21 70 21 70 45 150 90 300 90 300 90 300 150 500 150 500 210 500 300 1000 300 1000 750 2500 750 2500 750 2500 1250 2500 1250 2500 2000 4000
Time Delay Non-Time Delay Amperes
230 Volts, 3-Phase

1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 10 10 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 700 1000 6 6 6 10 15 20 25 40 50 60 70 100 125 150 175 225 300 350 450 3 6 6 10 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 110 150 175 225 300 350 15 20 25 30 50 70 90 150 175 225 250 350 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1600 6 10 15 15 25 35 45 70 90 110 125 175 200 150 300 400 500 600 800 6 10 10 15 20 30 35 60 70 90 100 125 175 200 250 300 400 450 600 15 15 15 20 30 50 60 90 100 125 150 150 200 225 300 400 500 600 700 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 45 50 70 70 100 110 250 150 175 225 250 350 15 15 15 15 15 20 25 40 50 60 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 225 300
E125 30 E125 50 E125 50 E125 100 E125 E125 E125 J250 J250 J250 HKD HKD HLD HLD HND E125 E125 E125 E125 E125 E125 E125 E125 100 150 150 150 150 250 400 400 600 600 600 3 7 7 15 15 30 30 50
460 Volts, 3-Phase
E125 50 E125 70 E125 100 E125 100 E125 J250 J250 J250 HKD HKD L600 HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HFD HJD HJD HJD HKD 100 250 250 250 400 400 600 3 7 7 7 15 30 30 30 50 50 70 100 100 150 150 150 250 250 400
575 Volts, 3-Phase
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1309
Home
TOC
Index

Technical Data/Dimensions
30.2-39
Master TOC
Table 30.2-82. Starter Sizes Selection Guide

Squirrel-Cage 230 V, 3-Phase Motor Control Center Full Load Horsepower Starter NEMA Current Amperes Size 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300

460 V, 3-Phase Wire Size at 75C Max. at 40C Amb. 14 14 14 14 14 14 12 10 10 8 6 4 3 1 1/0 3/0 4/0 300 kcmil 500 kcmil 2 4/0
575 V, 3-Phase
22
Control Center Full Load Starter NEMA Current Amperes Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 1.1 1.6 2.1 3.0 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361
Wire Size Control Center Full Load at 75C Max. Starter NEMA Current at 40C Amb. Size Amperes 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 8 8 6 4 3 2 1/0 3/0 4/0 300 kcmil 500 kcmil 2 4/0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 .9 1.3 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 242 289
Wire Size at 75C Max. at 40C Amb. 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 12 10 10 8 8 6 4 3 2 1/0 2/0 4/0 300 kcmil 400 kcmil
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
2.2 3.2 4.2 6.0 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480
2 300 kcmil 5 6 6
Information is based on Table 430-150 of NEC (1999). Information is based on use of copper conductors Table 310-16 and Tables 1, 4 and 5, Ch. 9 of NEC. If aluminum conductors are used refer to Table 310-16 of NEC (1999).

Location of Ground Bus A 12.1 12 (307.8) 10.50 (266.7) Horizontal Bus Location Vertical Bus Location 3.12 (79.2) 2.25 (57.2) Front Horizontal Wireway 7.16 (181.9) Deep Removable Bus Barrier Flat Rear Cover Supplied on Front Mounted Only Structure Minimum Rated Ve V rtical Bus Supplied as Standard in Front Mounted Only Structure
Front Horizontal Wireway 7.16 (181.9) Deep Location of Ground Bus 12 12 12.12 (307.8) 10.50 (266.7) A Horizontal Bus Location Vertical Bus Location Removable Bus Barrier 3.12 (79 9.2) 4.62 (11 17.3) 15.00 (381.0) 4.62 (117. (11 3) Rear Horizontal Wireway 4.97 (126.2) Deep
33 34 35 36 37
4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (117.3)
2.25 (57.2)
D B
B Floor Line 1.00 (2 25.4)

9.73 (247.14) o 14.11 (358.4) or 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5)
38
E 5.00 (1 (127.0)
9.73 (247.14) or 14.11 (358.4) 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5)
5.00 (127.0) 3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills il Supplied Only When Specified 3.00 (76 76.2)
Floor Line 1.00 (25.4)
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills 3.00 0 Supplied Only When Specified (76.2) (76 2
39 40 41 42 43
10.50 0 (266.7 7)
10.50 (266.7) 266 7
Location of Neutral B Bus When Specified
Figure 30.2-6. Side View A Front Mounted Only

Figure 30.2-7. Side View B Front and Rear Mounted

Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only. When location not specied, MTB supplied at the bottom. Standard structure arrangement in front Without MTB; A & B = 9 (228.6) With MTB at bottom; A & B = 9 (228.6) With MTB at top; A = 15 (381.0), B = 3 (76.2)

CA08104001E
Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only. When location not specied, MTB supplied at the bottom. Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure. Standard structure arrangement in front Without MTB; A & B = 9 (228.6) With MTB at bottom; A & B = 9 (228.6) With MTB at top; A = 15 (381.0), B = 3 (76.2) Standard structure arrangement in rear Without MTB; C = 9 (228.6), D = 72 (1828.8), E = 3 (76.2) With MTB at bottom; C = 0, D = 66 (1676.4), E = 9 (228.6) With MTB at top; C = 12 (304.8), D = 60 (1524.0), E = 3 (76.2)

Dimensions
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1310
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3.50 3 50 (88.9) ( Top Conduit Space
3.50 3 50 (88.9) (
Removable R bl Top Cover
5.41 (137.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1.25 (31.8) 17.50 50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0) 1.25 (31.8)
16.00 (406.4)
Vertical Wireway Door 1.25 (31.8) Wire Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) 4.81 (122.2) Vertical Wireway
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 (50.8) .36 (9.1) 16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.5 (88.9). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.5 x 9.73 (444.5 x 247.1). For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic. This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available. Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in FMO structure.
17.50 (444.5)
1.25 (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 13. 3 97 (354.8) Bottom Conduit Space .70 (17.8)
See Side View A Page 30.2-39 for vertical dimensions.
5.41 (137.4) 6.81 (173.0) 1.58 (40.1) .53 Dia.
16.00 (406.4)
2.00 (50.8) .53 Dia.
Figure 30.2-8. Front Mounted Only (FMO) in Inches (mm) 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 16 Inches (406.4 mm) Deep
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
34
Top Conduit Space
Removable Top Cover
35
5.41 (137.4)
20.38 (517.7)
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
2.20 (55.9) 1.25 (31.8)
17.50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0)
Vertical Wireway Door 1.25 (31.8) Wire Tie Brackets 1.25 (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 18.35 (46 66.1) Bottom Conduit Space 7.3 31 (185.7) 4.81 (122.2) Vertical Wireway
1.25 (31.8)
17.50 50 (444.50)
5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.8) 5.41 (137.4) 1.58 (40.1) .53 Dia. 16.00 (406.4)
2.00 00 (50.8) .53 Dia. .
.70 (17.8)
Figure 30.2-9. Front Mounted Only (FMO) in Inches (mm) 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1311
Home
TOC
Index

Dimensions
30.2-41
Master TOC
22
2.20 (55.9) 3.22 (81.79) Top Conduit Space 5.41 (137.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1.25 (31.8)
3.50 (88.9)
3 50 3.50 (88.9) Removable Top Cover
21.00 (533.4)
Front Vertical Wireway Door 17.50 50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0) 1.25 (31.8) 7.3 31 (185.7) Rear Vertical Wireway
4.81 (122.2)
Wire Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) Vertical Wireway
1.25 (31.8)
17.50 50 (444.50)
1.25 (31.8)
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 (50.8) .36 (9.1) 16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.5 (88.9). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.5 x 14.11 (444.5 x 358.4) in 21-inch deep structure. 7.5 x 9.73 (190.5 x 247.1) in 16-inch deep structure. For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic. This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available. Channel sills supplied only when specied. For seismic loads channel sills if required must be embedded so top of channel sill is still at oor level.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.81) 5.41 (137.4)
Removable Bottom Frame Members 18.35 (466.1) Bottom Conduit Space
4.81 (122.2)
See Side View B Page 30.2-39 for vertical dimensions.
.53 Dia.
16.00 (406.4)
2.00 (50.8) .53 Dia.
1.32 (33.5)
Figure 30.2-10. Front and Rear Mounted in Inches (mm) 20 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep
Removable Top Cover Ground Bus Location 12.12 (307.9)
Horizontal Bus Location 3.12 (79.25) 4.62 (117.35) 4.62 (117.35) Removable Bus Barrier
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Top Conduit Space 5.41 (137.4)
20.38 (517.7) or 16.00 (406.4)
2.25 (57.15)
2.20 1.25 (55.9) (31.8)
7.50 (190.5 5) 10.00 0 00 (254.0) 7.50 (190.5)
1.25 (31.8)
Horizontal Wireway 7.16 inches (181.9 mm) deep
1.25 (31.8)
1.25 (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 18.35 (466.1) or 13.97 (354.8) Bottom Conduit Space .70 (17.8) Floor Line 1.00 (25.4)
9.73 (247.14) or 14.11 (358.4) 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5)
Flat Cover Supplied on Rear of Front Mounted Only Structure
5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.81) 5.41 (137.4) 1.58 (40.1) .53 Dia. (2) 5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
3.00 (76.2)
41 42 43
10.50 (266.7)
Figure 30.2-11. Transition Structure in Inches (mm) 10 Inches (254.0 mm) Wide, 16 or 21 Inches (406.4 or 533.4 mm) Deep

Dimensions
Home
TOC
Index
June 2006
Sheet 1312
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
.5) 1.75 (44.5 Lower Horizontal Wireway Door 2.25 (57.2 .2) 95.25 5 (2 2419.4) 90.00 (22 2286.0 6.0) 1.88 (47.8) 4.25 (108.0) Top Conduit Space 3.50 0 (88.9) C L 3.50 (88.9) .18 (4.6) 6
SECTION A-A 23 50 23.50 (599 4) (599.
Minimum Rated Vertical Bus Supplied on Front Mounted Only Structures .18 (4.6) Vertical V Ve Wireway Wire Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) 4.25 (108.0)
2.87 (72.9) 7.97 (204.2) 20.30 (515.6) 28.85 (732.8)
4.81 (122.2) 9.80 (248.9) 25 75 25. (654.1) 2.25 (5 57.2 .2) 28.85 (732. 32 8)
1.75 (44.5) n
Upper Horizontal Wireway Door
4.82 (122.4)
Ve Vertical V Bus Location 4.62 (117.3)
2.38 (60.5)
2.12 (53.8)
Vertical V Ve Wireway 94.62 (2 2403.3) 1.25 (31.8) Max. 5.00 (127.0) 2.25 (57.2) Floor Line 15.69 (398.5) 4.31 (109.5) 20 (508.0) B 1.56 (39.6) .75 (19.1)
Channel Sills 4 x 1.56 (101.6 x 39.6) Detail 2
.75 (19.1) 24.85 (631.2) 2)
01 02 03
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

1.75 4.00 0 (44.5) (101.6 6) .75 (19.1)
24.85 (631.2) 2) 14.0 04
1.88 (47.8) Bottom Conduit Space
4.00 (101.6) Location of Neutral Bus When Specified
23 35 23.35 (593.1) (593 24.85 (631.2) Detail 1
5.00 (127.0) 5.78 (146.8) 5.00 (127.0) 3.78 (96.0 (96.0) 3.00 0 (76 6.2) 2 17.50 (444.5) 23.50 (596.9) .75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2) 3.75 (95 3 (95.3) 24.85 15.78 (631.2) (400.8) 23.35 (593.1)
16.00 (406.4)
3 75 3. (95.3) 95 3
Figure 30.2-12. IT. Control Center Outline and Floor Plan NEMA 3R 28.85-Inch (732.8 mm) Deep Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2 inches (50.8 mm). 38 (9.7 mm) 16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.5 inches (88.9 mm). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 15.78 x 16.6 inches (400.8 x 421.6 mm). Master terminal block assembly furnished for type C wiring only. When location not specied MTB supplied at the bottom. Recommended standard anchor bolting for Detail 1. When channel sills are used see Detail 2. This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available. Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure. Standard structure arrangement (In front) without master terminal block, A and B 9 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom, A and B 9 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A 15 inches (381.0 mm), B 3 inches (76.2 mm).
Note: Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure. Note: The 16-inch deep (interior) enclosures require only a 24.22-inch (615.2 mm) depth exterior enclosure.
CA08104001E
June 2006
Sheet 1313
Home
TOC
Index

Motor Control Center Layout Form
30.2-43
Master TOC
Table 30.2-83. Arrangement of Structures (Numbered from Left to Right) Typical Dimensions: Indoor 20-Inch (508.0 mm) W, 90-Inch (2286.0 mm) H; Outdoor 23.5-Inch (596.9 mm) W, 95.25-Inch (2419.4 mm) H
A B C D E F G H J K L M (STR#) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Shipping Split (When Desired) Future Space Only Unusable Space Unit No. Starter Size HMCP Class or Feeder Description Breaker or Switch Amperes hp Extra Intlks. Control Devices Pushbutton Selector Switches Fast-Off-Slow-Auto Fwd-Off-Rev-Auto Indicating Lights Red (Run, Fwd, Fast) Meters Nameplate Identications A B C D E F G H J K L M
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Green (Stopped)
Red (Rev. Slow)
Fast-Slow-Stop
Hand-Off-Auto
Fwd-Rev-Stop
Elapsed Time
Push-To-Test
Start-Stop
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
NO
NC
CA08104001E

Home TOC Index
June 2006
Sheet 1314
Master TOC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
NEMA is the registered trademark and service mark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Mass. UL is a federally registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. Siemens is a federally registered trademark of Siemens AG. Modbus is a registered trademark of Modicon, a division of Schneider Electric Industries SA. PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS International. Cutler-Hammer is a federally registered trademark of Eaton Corporation. Teon is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont de Nemours and Company.
CA08104001E

CCM Freedom

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CCM Freedom

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage

Freedom and Advantage Motor Control Center

Intelligent Technologies Motor Control Center

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

30.0-2 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage

This page intentionally left blank.

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

2100 Series Motor Control Center

NEMA Classications (ICS 3, Part 1)

Freedom and Advantage Motor Control Center

Class II Control Centers

Replacement MCC Units

NEMA Types of Wiring

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

30.1-2 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Standard Structure Arrangements

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Top Horizontal Wireway

Vertical Bus Conguration Bottom Horizontal Wireway

Standard Isolation Barrier

MCC Bus Layout

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

30.1-4 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Neutral Bus (Bottom) Horizontal Bus

Ground Bus (Top)

Labyrinth Barrier with Automatic Shutter Mechanism

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Units Freedom Starter

Freedom FVNR Starter

Units Advantage Starter

Advantage FVNR Starter

30.1-6 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Units Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters

Feeder Tap Units

IT. SSRV Starter Unit

Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanism

Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs dc Starter Unit

Unit Insertion Interlock

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Advantage Device Panel with ACM and Metering Module

The handle mechanism provides several safety features:

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

30.1-8 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Front Rail Mounted Terminal Blocks

Unit Wrapper Latch

Side Mounted Latched Pull-Apart Terminal Block

12-Inch (304.8 mm) Unit Door

Plug-in Unit Maintenance

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Spring-Loaded Unit Door 1/4 Turn Latch

Control and Load Terminations

Main Lugs Only (MLO)

Master Terminal Blocks at Bottom (Class C Wiring)

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

30.1-10 Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage

Central Monitoring Unit

For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com

Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Freedom & Advantage